G!assJE£Uuii- Book -Da i*ri7 PRACTICAL FRENCH COURSE IN FIFTY LESSONS AN ENTIRELY NEW METHOD BY RAPHAEL D'AMOUR, A. M.,Ph.D OFFICIER D'ACADÉMIE, DIRECTOR OF THE FRENCH DEPARTMENT IN THE SCHOOL OF PEDAGOGY OF THE BROOKLYN INSTITUTE OF ARTS AND SCIENCES; THIRD EDÏTION NEW YORK 1917 c rt 3 Entered according to act of Congress in the office of The Librarian of Congress at Washington, D. C. 1917 By RAPHAËL D'AMOUR All Rights Reserved he Aster Press New York PREFACE This radically new method of learning the French language embodies in concrete form the working principle of the author, namely: "To teach Americans how to say in French the very things they are daily saying in English," thus doing away with the useless phraseology of the old grammars so humor- ously ridiculed by Mark Twain. The fact is, that in this practical age of ours a • speaking knowledge of modern lan- guages, of French especially, has become a matter of necessity, the time being long past when a foreign tongue was studied, like L,atin and Greek, for the mere sake of general culture and polish. Originally written for those students who wish to master French rapidly, either for pleasure or business, the present grammar is now used with great success in colleges and schools, also by the best private teachers, here and abroad. The ever-increasing popularity of this book, which has already reached the third edition, is the most convincing proof of its practical value. In the two preliminary lessons of this grammar the pupil is taught: First, how to pronounce, read and write French; second, how to distinguish, by a very simple rule, the gender of French nouns, and to form the plural of the same; third, how to acquire an extensive French vocabulary by mere observation. In the subsequent practical lessons the student is led, gradually and logically, through the intricacies of the lan- guage, from those conventional phrases in current daily use, to the fluent form of conversation and the mastery of idiomatic French. Each one of the first twenty-five lessons is followed by a practical exercise, in which the pupil has to complete a certain number of sentences by supplying missing words, an excellent system for learning to write in French. An important innovation will be found in the following lessons, in the practical exercises to be translated into French: By indicating the strict literal structure of each French sen- tence in English, the author feels confident to have not only greatly simplified the task of the student, but also to have paved the way toward learning to think in French. Special attention is called to the following features: 1. Table of the French sounds with their nearest equivalents' in English. 2. Three introductory lessons containing set phrases in current daily use. 3. Unity of subject for each grammatical lesson. 4. A brief, yet comprehensive tabulation of the irregular verbs. 5. The most commonly used idiomatic expressions. 6. Literary quotations. 7. French proverbs. 8. Short anecdotes. 9. Classical definitions. The author now presents this new, thoroughly revised and considerably improved edition, with the hope that it may meet with the kind approval of those teachers and students who wish to leave the long-beaten path, and use, for teaching and learn- ing French, a common-sense method. RAPHAËL D'AMOUR. New York, September, 1917. TABLE OF CONTENTS. LESSON I. PRONUNCIATION. 1 How to Call the Letters of the French Alphabet 2 Table of the French Sounds with their nearest equivalents in English 3 Miscellaneous Rules LESSON II. GENERAL NOTIONS. How to Accent the Vowels 22 How to Read French 24 How to Distinguish the Gender of French Nouns 26 How to Form the Plural of French Nouns 27 How to See at a Glance the Similarity between a great many- English and French Words 28 Exercise 29 LESSONS III - V. USUAL PHRASES. i The Salutation 30 2 The Days 31 3 The Months 34 4 The Seasons 34 5 The Weather 35 6 The Time of Day 37 7 The Present, Past and Future 38 LESSON VI. page The indefinite article. i Grammatical Rules 39 2 Practice 39 3 Exercise 43 LESSON VII. THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. i Grammatical Rules 44 2 Practice 45 3 Countries 47 4 Nationalities 47 5 Exercise 48 LESSON VIII. CONTRACTION OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. i Genitive or Possessive Case 49 2 Dative Case 51 3 Practice 52 4 Important Remark on the word Home 53 5 Exercise 53 LESSON IX. THE PARTITIVE ARTICLE. 1 Grammatical Rules 55 2 Practice 57 3 Exercise 59 LESSON X. INTERROGATIVE AND NEGATIVE FORMS. i How to Form Questions 60 2 How to Form Answers 61 3 How to Form Negative Sentences 63 4 Negative Expressions 65 5 Exercise '. 65 LESSON XI. page NUMERAL ADJECTIVES, i Cardinal Numbers 66 2 Ordinal Numbers 69 3 Fractional Numbers 70 4 Nouns used as Numbers 71 5 Exercise 71 LESSON XII. DEMONSTRATIVE AND POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES. 1 Grammatical Rules 73 2 Practice 76 3 Exercise 78 LESSON XIII. QUALIFYING ADJECTIVES. i How to Form the Feminine of Adjectives 79 2 How to Form the Plural of Adjectives 80 3 Place of Adjectives 80 4 Irregular Adjectives 82 5 Practice 84 6 Exercise 85 LESSON XIV. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 1 How to Form the Comparative of Adjectives 87 2 How to Form the Superlative of Adjectives 89 3 Comparative Expressions , 92 4 Exercise 92 LESSON XV. INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES. 1 Different Meanings of the word Heme 94 2 Different Meanings of the word Tout 96 3 Practical Expressions formed with the Adjectives Tout and Même 97 4 Other Indefinite Adjectives 98 5 Exercise 99 LESSON XVI. page PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 1 Personal Pronouns used as Subject of the Verb 101 2 Personal Pronouns used Objectively 103 3 Place of Personal Pronouns 103 4 Practice 104 5 Important Remarks 106 6 Exercise 108 LESSON XVII. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS, i How to Render in French the Interrogative Pronoun Who. 109 2 How to Render in French the Interrogative Pronoun Whom. no 3 How to Render in French the Interrogative Pronouns What, Which 112 4 Practice 113 5 Exercise 114 LESSON XVIII. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. i How to Render in French the Demonstrative Pronouns This, That, These, Those 115 2 Demonstrative Pronouns used Absolutely 117 3 Important Remarks on the Pronoun It 117 4 Practical Expressions formed with C'est, (it is or that is) 119 5 How to Render in French the Demonstrative form Here is, Here are, There is, There are 120 6 Exercise 120 LESSON XIX. RELATIVE AND POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS, i How to Render in French the Pronouns Who, Whom, To Whom 122 2 How to Render in French the Pronouns Which, Of Which, To Which 123 3 Demonstrative and Relative Pronouns Combined 125 4 Possessive Pronouns 126 5 Practice 127 6 Exercise 127 LESSON XX. page INVARIABLE PRONOUNS. 1 Practical Exercise on the very important word En (some, any, of it, of them, from there) 130 2 Practical Exercise on the word Y (to it, to them; at it, at them; there) 133 3 Idiomatic Expressions formed with the word Y 134 4 Exercise for Translation 135 LESSON XXI. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 1 On (one, somebody, people) 136 2 Quelqu'un (somebody, someone, anybody) 136 3 Personne (no one, nobody) 136 4 Quelque chose (something) 137 5 Rien (nothing).... 137 6 Quelques uns (some, a few) 137 7 Chacun (each one) 138 8 Tout le monde (everybody) 138 9 Quiconque (whoever) 138 ro L'un, L'autre (the one, the other) 138 11 Autrui (others) 139 12 Exercise 140 LESSON XXII. THE ADVERB. 1 How to form Adverbs 141 2 Place of Adverbs 142 3 List of Adverbial Expressions 142 4 Important Remark on the Adverbs of Quantity 144 5 Practice 145 6 Exercise 146 LESSON XXIII. PAGE INVARIABLE WORDS. 1 The Preposition 147 2 The Conjunction 148 3 The Interjection 148 4 Practice 149 5 Exercise 153 LESSON XXIV. PRACTICAL EXERCISE ON SOME INVARIABLE WORDS HAVING SEVERAL MEANINGS. A— En —De— Que— Bien — Si — Pour— Par — Ou — Où — Jusque. 155 LESSON XXV. REMARKS ON THE RIGHT USE OF SOME PRACTICAL WORDS. 1 Day, Morning, Evening 164 2 Year, Parents, Relatives, Father-in-Law, etc 165 3 Piece, Lecture, Office 166 4 End, Ticket, Bill, Note 167 5 Present, Gift, Mouth, Fire 168 6 Word, Linen, Next 169 7 Audience, Sensible, Wages, Rivers 170 8 Exercise 171 LESSON XXVI. AUXILIARY VERBS. 1 Conjugation of the Verbs Avoir, to have, and Etre, to be.... 172 2 Negative form 177 3 Interrogative form 178 LESSON XXVII. VERB ETRE, TO BE. 1 Practical Exercise on that Verb 180 2 Idiomatic Expressions formed with the Verb Etre 183 3 Exercise for Translation 184 LESSON XXVIII. VERB AVOIR, TO HAVE. 1 Practical Exercise on that Verb 185 2 Idiomatic Expressions formed with the Verb Avoir 191 3 Exercise for Translation 191 LESSON XXIX. REGULAR VERBS. i General Notions 192 2 Hints for Conjugating the Regular Verbs 193 3 Table of Conjugation 195 4 Exercise for Translation 199 LESSON XXX. LIST OE THE MOST PRACTICAL VERBS. 1 Verbs of the first Conjugation 201 2 Remarks on the Spelling of some Verbs of the first Conju- gation 206 3 Verbs of the second Conjugation 207 4 Verbs of the third Conjugation 207 5 Exercise for Translation 208 LESSON XXXI. THE USE OF THE TENSES, i Grammatical Rules. 2 Practice. 3 Exercise for Translation. LESSON XXXII. THE PRESENT PARTICIPLE. I Grammatical Rules. 2 Practice 216 THE PAST PARTICIPLE. 1 Grammatical Rules. 2 Practice. 3 Exercise for Translation.. 218 LESSON XXXIII. THE PRESENT OF THE INDICATIVE. 1 Grammatical Rules. 2 Practice THE IMPERFECT OF THE INDICATIVE, i Grammatical Rules. 2 Practice. 3 Exercise for Translation. LESSON XXXIV. THE PAST INDEFINITE. 1 Grammatical Rules. 2 Practice. 3 Exercise for Translation.. 228 LESSON XXXV. THE PAST DEFINITE. Grammatical Rules. 2 Practice. 3 Exercise for Translation.. 234 LESvSON XXXVI. THE FUTURE. 1 Grammatical Rules. 2 Practice 238 THE CONDITIONAL. 1 Grammatical Rules. 2 Practice. 3 Exercise for Translation.. 240 LESSON XXXVII. THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD, i Grammatical Rules. 2 Practice. 3 Exercise for Translation.. 244 LESSON XXXVIII. THE IMPERATIVE MOOD. I Grammatical Rules. 2 Practice. 3 Exercise for Translation.. 252 LESSON XXXIX. page Miscellaneous Rules 257 LESSONS XL.— XLIL 1 Practical Exercise on some Important Verbs of the first Conju- gation. 2 Exercise for Translation 264 LESSON XLIII. 1 Practical Exercise on some Important Verbs of the second and third Conjugations. 2 Exercise for Translation 283 LESSON XLIV. 1 How to form the Compound Tenses of the Verbs of Motion. 2 Practice... 290 IMPERSONAL VERBS. 1 Conjugation of Impersonal Verbs. 2 Practice. 3 Exercise for Translation 292 LESSONS XLV.— XLVI. Irregular Verbs 296 LESSON XLVII. REFLEXIVE VERBS. I Model of Conjugation. 2 Practical Exercise on some Important Reflexive Verbs 316 LESSON XLVIII. French Proverbs 326 LESSON XLIX. Reading and Memory Exercises. Short Anecdotes 330 LESSON L. Definitions. 334 Practical French Course 15 PREMIÈRE LECON. LESSON I. PRONUNCIATION. I.— How to call the letters of the French alphabet. A B c D E F G H ah bay say day ay eff zhay ash T K L M N p Q zhee kah ell emm enn oh pay kiï S T u V X Y z ess tay ii vay eeks ee greek, zedd R The letter w, called in French double v (doobl vay), is found only in some foreign words which have been adopted into the French language. II. — Table of the French sounds with their nearest equivalents in English. Although the pronunciation is best acquired by studying the practical lessons with a French teacher, we will give the following table as a useful guide to be consulted when the learner does not know how to pro- nounce a word. 16 Practical French Course VOWELS. A is pronounced ah Panama Pa-na-ma Panama E (unaccented) is silent when final. madame mah-dâm madam It is however sounded and le lur the pronounced somewhat like de dur of ur (r silent) in monosyl- cela sur-lah that lables and at the beginning a of polysyllables. É with an acute accent (A) sounds like ay. café kah-fay coffee E with a grave accent (A) sounds like ai in fair. père pair father Ê with a circumflex accent (A) sounds broad like ea in pear. ' rêve rev dream 1 sounds always like ee. ami ahm-ee friend O sounds always like o in so. opéra oh-pay-rah opera U sounds nearly like the Ger- lu lu read man ii or somewhat like eu vu vii seen 111 pleurisy. Y at the beginning of a word yacht yacht yacht or between two consonants style steel style is pronounced ee. But when placed between payé pay-yay paid two vowels it has the dis- tinct sound of two French is. DIPHTHONGS. ai is pronounced ay. balai bah -lay broom au or eau is pronounced oh. eau oh water ei sounds like ai in fair. reine renn queen eu or œu sounds nearly like u in fur. feu fur fire oi sounds nearly like wah. foi fwah faith ou sounds like oo in too. fou foo crazy Practical French Course 17 COMBINED VOWELS. A vowel surmounted by a diaeresis (""), tréma, does not form a diphthong with another vowel, but either vowel is to be pronounced separately. Thus, for instance, the word naif, naive, must be pronounced as if written nah-if. Likewise, the following are not diphthongs, but com- bined vowels to be pronounced separately : IA pronounced as if written ee-ah. il pria ill-pree-ah he prayed UA pronounced as if written u-ah. il salua ill-sah-liï-ah he saluted Ul pronounced as if written u-ee. minuit me-niï-ee midnight UO pronounced as if written u-oh. duo dii-oh duet NASAL SOUNDS. The combination of a vowel or diphthong with the con- sonant m or n produces what we call in French, le son nasal, (the nasal sound). The nasal sounds are represented by the following com- binations : AN 1 [ maman mah-mông mama AM 1 pronounced nearly like ! lampe lômp lamp EN ông (final g silent). | encore Qng-core yet, again EM J empire om-peer empire IN r vin vâng wine IM AIN AIM h pronounced nearly like ! &ng (final g silent). limpide pain faim lâm-peed pâng fang limpid bread hunger EIN J 1 sem sang bosom 18 Practical French Course ON OM ) pronounced nearly like f > ông (final g silent). <. bon tombeau bông tôm-boh good tomb UN UM (pronounced nearly like ( S ûng (final g silent). 1 lundi parfum lung-dee par-fûng Monday perfume IEN OIN ( pronounced nearly like ) I ee-ang (final g silent). ) ( pronounced nearly like "> t wang (final g silent). ) bien loin bee-àng lw-âng well far OBSERVATION. If the consonant m or n is doubled, or is immediately followed by a vowel, the nasal sound is not given, but the initial vowel must be pronounced separately. Thus, for instance, the words innocent, immense, image, vinaigre, must be pronounced as if written : ee-noh-sahng, ee-môngs, ee-mahzh, vee-neg-ger. LIQUID SOUNDS. The following combinations represent what we call in French les sons liquides (lay song leekeed), the liquid sounds. Their pronunciation must be heard from the mouth of a French teacher : all pronounced nearly like eye. travail trahv-eye work aille pronounced nearly like ah-yùr. Versailles Vair-sah-yûr Versailles ell pronounced nearly like ay-ye. soleil so-lay-ye sun eille pronounced nearly like ay-yûr. abeille ah-bay-yur bee eull pronounced nearly like ôe-ye. fauteuil foh-tœ-ye arm-chair Practical French Course; 19 euille pronounced nearly- like œ-yûr. feuille fœ-yûr leaf Hie pronounced nearly like ee-yûr. fille fee-yûr girl ouille pronounced nearly like oo-yûr. grenouille grûn-noo-yur frog gne pronounced nearly like nee-yûr. champagne shôm-pah-nee- [er champagne CONSONANTS. The consonants not mentioned in the following table are pronounced as in English. c is hard like k be- fore a, o, u. café kah-fay coffee It is soft like s be- ceci sûs-sëe this fore e, i, and when a cedilla is maçon mah-sông mason CH placed under it. sounds generally like sh. chien she-âng dog It is hard like k before a conso- chrétien kray-tee-âng christian nant. CUE is pronounced nearly like cu in cur. cueillir cur-yeer to gather G sounds hard like g in garden, before the vowels a, o, u, and also be- fore a conso- nant. garçon gourmand Gustave gar-sông goor-mông Giis-tahv boy, waiter greedy Gustave It sounds soft, genou zher-noo knee somewhat like s in pleasure, be- fore the vowels e, i. girafe zhee-raf giraffe 20 Practicai, French Course GU followed by e or i guerre ghair war sounds like the figuier fee-ghe-ay fig-tree hard g. H is not sounded in l'homme lohm {the) man French, and les hommes lay-zohm (the) men therefore it is generally called mute. When called aspi- la harpe lah-ahrp the harp rate, it only pre- le hameau ler-ah-moh the hamlet vents the con- les hameaux lay-ah-moh the hamlets nection with the les haricots lay-ah-ree-koh the beans last consonant of the preceding word, and also the elision of the vowels a, e, be- fore it. J is pronounced joli zho-lee pretty nearly like s in jamais zhah-may never pleasure. LL preceded by an i brillant bree-yông brilliant and followed by rouillé roo-yay rusty a or e, are called famille fah-mee-yur family liquid, and they sound somewhat like ye or yur. However, 11 sounds ville veal city like a single 1 in a few words. QU sounds generally like k. qui key who, whom However, in a few aquarelle ah-kwah-rell water-color words it is pro- nounced as in English. S sounds generally like S in so. soldat sol-dah soldier When between two maison may-zông house vowels it sounds like z. Practical French Course 21 T is pronounced martial mar-see-ahl martial like S in words position poh-zee-see-ông position ending in ion, situation see-tù-ah-see- situation ial, ieux, and in [ông some words end- ambitieux ôm-bee-see-yur ambitious ing in ie, as pro- phétie, démocra- tie, aristocratie, diplomatie. TH sounds always like t in tobacco. thé tay tea MISCELLANEOUS RULES. 1. At the end of a word the syllables et, ez, ed, er, are pronounced ay. Poulet (poo-lay), chicken; parler (par-lay), to speak. Allez (ah-lay), go ; pied (pee-ay), foot. However, the words amer, bitter ; enfer, hell; fier, proud, are pro- nounced ah-mair, ông-fair, fee-air. 2. In monosyllables, and also when beginning a poly- syllable, er sounds air; cher (shair), dear; perdu (pair-du), lost ; chercher (shair-shay), to look for. 3. Before a word beginning with a vowel or an h mute, X sounds like z : dix oranges, (deezohrôngzh). D sounds like t : grand opéra, (grÔntohpayrah). F sounds like v : neuf hommes, (nûvohm). 4; Ent is silent when it. marks the third person plural of a verb. However, if the next word begins with a vowel, the final t is sounded and carried over. Ils parlent (ill pari), they speak. Ils parlent anglais (ill pari tônglay), they speak English. 5. The final t of et, and, is never pronounced. Etsounds always ay. 22 Practical French Course; DEUXIEME LEÇON. LESSON II. GENERAL NOTIONS. -How to accent the vowels. The vowels, in French, are rendered long or short by- certain accents or marks placed over them. There are three orthographic accents : the acute (f) l'ac- cent aigu; the grave (^), V accent grave ; the circumflex ( A ), V accent circonflexe. i . The acute accent placed upon e gives it the sound ofay. Café (kah-fay), coffee ; bonté (bong-tay), goodness. 2. The grave accent placed upon e gives that vowel the sound of ai va fair. Père (pair), father; mère (rnair), mother; frère ( frair), brother. The grave accent serves also to contradistinguish a few words which have the same sound, but a different meaning. Thus a, unaccented, means has. à, accented, " at or to. la, unaccented, " the. là, accented, " there. ou, unaccented, " or. où, accented, " where. 3. The circumflex accent gives the vowel a broader, longer sound, and generally denotes the suppression of a Practicai, French Course 23 letter which was formerly used after the vowel over which it is placed. That letter — generally an s — has been pre- served in a number of English words coming from the French, as : Mât, mast; île, isle ; forêt, forest ; hôpital, hospital. ELISION. The vowels a, e, are generally cut off and replaced by an apostrophe before words beginning with a vowel or an h mute. Thus, we write and pronounce for the sake of euphony : L'armée, the army, instead of la armée. 1/ enfant, the child, " le enfant. L'homme, the man, " le homme. J'ai, I have, je ai. J'aime, I like, " je aime. Je l'aime, I like it, " je le aime. HYPHEN. A hyphen, called in French trait d'union, is placed between the two parts of a compound noun or number. Porte-monnaie, pocket-book. Dix-sept, seventeen. A hyphen is also placed between the verb and the pro- noun in the interrogative sentences and in the imperative mood used affirmatively. Avez-vous ? — Have you ? Donnez-moi. — Give me. Est-il ? — Is he ? Donnez-le-moi. —Give it to me. Dlv-ERESIS. A diaeresis, called in French tréma, is placed over the vowels which are to be pronounced separately. Thus, for instance, the word hair, to hate, must be pro- nounced ah-eer. Without the trema, or two dots over the i, it would be pronounced air. 24 Practical French Course CEDILLA. A cedilla ( 5 ), called in French cédille (say-dee-yur), is placed under the letter ç before the vowels a, o, u, when it should be pronounced like s in so. Façade (fah-sad), front ; garçon (gar-song), boy; reçu (rer-siï), received. II. — How to read French. SYLLABIC ACCENT. As a rule, the stress is laid, in French, upon the last syllable in all words not ending with a mute e, and upon the last syllable but one in words ending with a mute e. Chapeau, hat. I Vorte, door. Généra/, General . ! Che;«/se, shirt. AmériM/H, American. Différrwce, difference. Popular///', popularity. \ Popu/ace, mob. IMPORTANT RULES ABOfT THi: I-TNAL CONSONANTS. I. The last consonant of a word is generally silent, ex- cept when the following word begins with a vowel or an h mute. However, the four letters c, f, 1, r, are often sounded at the end of a word. Examples : Mais (may), but. Lit (lee), bed. Tapis (tah-pee), carpet. Nous parlons (noo-par-long), we speak. Due (diik), Duke. CEuf fuf , Fil (fill), thread. Soir (swahr), evening. Practical French Course 25 2. The last consonant of a word is generally sounded, carried over and joined to the next word when it begins with a vowel or an h mute. The slurring of a final consonant to the following vowel is called in French, liaison. The liaison being very important for a pure pronuncia- tion, and in order to help and accustom the learner to notice it, we will indicate the same, in the first ten lessons, by this sign w. Thus : Vous avez, you have, pronounced as if spelt voo-zah-vay. Vous êtes, you are, " " " voo-zett. Les enfants, the children, " " " lay-zon-fong. Les hommes, the men, " " " lay-zohm. Mes amis, my friends, " " " may-zah-mee. 3. In words ending in rd, rt, the r is carried over in- stead of the final d or t. C'est lourd à porter (say-loo-rah portay), it is heavy to carry. Il est mort à Paris (ee-lay moh-rah Pah-ree), he died in Paris. 4. Final n is not carried over to the following vowel so as to preserve the nasal sound : Ma maison est grande (mah may-zong ay grônd), my house is However, the n of on (one, people, they), and also the n of en (in, of it, of them, some, any), must be carried over. On a sonné (ohnah sonay), someone has rung. J'en ai assez (zhah-nay-ah-say), I have enough of it. 26 Practical French Course IMPORTANT OBSERVATIONS ABOUT THE LETTER E. I. Final e is not sounded before a word beginning with a vowel or an h mute. The liaison must be made without any regard to that e or h. Thus, for instance : Elle est, she is, must be pronounced ell-ay. Elle a, she has, must be pronounced ell-ah. Je parle un peu, / speak a little, must be pronounced zher-par-lung-pur. Elle hésite, she hesitates, must be pronounced ell-ay-zeet. 2. In conversation the e of the second monosyllable is not sounded. Thus : Je le sais, I know it, is pronounced zhull-say. Je ne sais pas, I do not know, is pronounced zhun-say-pah. 3. The letter e is also frequently slided over in the mid- dle of a word. Thus : Appeler, to call, is pronounced as if spelt ôp-lay. Epe 1er, A > sf>e/l, " " " ayp-lay. Acheter, /<> buy, " " " ash-tay. Amener, to bring, " " " ahm-nay. III. — How to distinguish the gender of a French noun. There is no neuter gender in French. All the substantives in the French language are either masculine or feminine. The gender of substantives may be determined by the following general rule : Practical French Course 27 OF THE FEMININE GENDER ARE : Besides, of course, the nouns denoting a female by- nature, — All the nouns ending in ion — All the nouns ending in aison — Most nouns ending in eur — Most nouns ending in té —Most nouns (about 95 per cent.) ending with a mute....e Nouns ending otherwise will generally be found mascu- line. Practice will teach the exceptions to the above very simple rule. IV. — How to form the plural of French nouns. The plural of a noun, in French, is generally formed, as in English, by adding an s to the singular, but the s is not to be sounded, except before a word beginning with a vowel or an h mute. The number of a French noun is always clearly indi- cated by the prefixed article or adjective. Un sou, one cent. Deux sous, two cents. Trois francs, three francs. Le livre, the book. Les livres, the books. Des pommes, some apples. EXCEPTIONS. I. The nouns ending in the singular with s, x, z, do not change in the plural. Le fils, the son. La voix, the voice. Le nez, the nose. Les fils, the sons. Les voix, the voices. Les nez, the noses. 28 Practical French Course 2. The nouns ending in the singular in au, eau, eu, take x in the plural. Le drapeau, the flag. Le feu, the fire. Les drapeaux, the flags. Les feux, the fires. 3. The nouns ending in the singular in al, ail, generally change those terminations into aux in the plural. Le cheval, the horse. Un journal, a newspaper. Le travail, the work. Les chevaux, the horses. Des journaux, {some) news- papers. Les travaux, the works. V. — How to see at a glance the similarity between a great many English and French words. (1). Most words (over 2,000) ending with the following terminations are the same in both languages : al animal, rival, fatal, musical, etc. ce silence, science, chance, face. de parade, brigade, suicide, homicide. ge page, rage, courage, outrage. le simple, table, possible, terrible. ne mine, doctrine, famine, canine. ant restaurant, instant, important, constant. ent accent, moment, accident, monument. ion nation, situation, occasion, excursion. (2). Most English words ending with one of the follow- ing terminations become French by changing it as follows : y into ie malady maladie ty into té activity activité er into re letter lettre Ic into ique Republic République Id into Ide solid solide Practical French Course 29 or into eur doctor docteur ism into isme Catholicism catholicisme ist into iste dentist dentiste ive into if motive motif ary into aire ordinary ordinaire ency into ence excellency excellence ory into oire victory victoire ous into eux curious curieux OBSERVATION. Practice will teach the exceptions to the above rules 1. Le crayon (m.), the pencil 2. La fenêtre (f.), the window, 3. Le chien (m.), the dog. 4. Le chat (m.), the cat. 5. Le cheval (m.), the horse. 6. Un général (m.), a general. 7. Une noix (f.), a nut. 8. Un chapeau (m.), a hat. 9. Une plume (f.), a pen. 10. Une chaise (f.), a chair. 11. Une table (f.), a table. 12. Un bureau (m.), a desk. 13. Un gant (m.), a glove. 14. Un animal (m.), an animal 15. Une leçon (f.), a lesson. EXERCISE. 1. Les 2. Les 3- Les 4. Les 5- Les 6. Des 7. Des 8. Des 9. Des 10. Des 11. Des 12. Des 13. Des 14. Des 15. Des -, the pencils. -, the windows. -, the dogs. -, the cats. -, the horses. -, (some) generals. -, (some) nuts. -, (some) hats. -, (some) pens. -, (some) chairs. -, (some) tables. -, (some) desks. -, (some) gloves. -, (some) animals. -, (some) lessons. 30 Practical French Course TROISIEME LEÇON. LESSON III. USUAL PHRASES. On a sonné. On a frappé. Qui est là ? Qui est-ce? C'est moi. Entrez. Bonjour, monsieur. Bonjour, madame. Bonjour, mademoiselle. Je suis charmé de vous voir. Charmé de faire votre connais- sance. Le plaisir est pour moi. < >tez votre paletot. ( >tez votre jaquette. Otez votre manteau. Mettez- vous à votre aise. Faites comme chez vous. Asseyez-vous. Veuillez vous asseoir. Merci. Comment vous portez-vous ? Comment allez-vous ? Comment ça va? (familiar. ) Somebody has rung. Somebody has knocked. Who is tlnre t Who is it t It is I. Come in. Good morning-, sir. Good morning, madam. Good morning, miss. I am glad to see you. Glad to make your acquaintance. The pleasure is mine. Take off your coat. Take off your jacket. 'Take offyour e/oak. Make yourself comfortable. Make yourself at home. Sit down. Please be sealed. Thank you. How do you dot HOW are you f How goes it :' Practical French Course 31 Très bien, merci ; et vous-même? Assez bien, merci. Pas trop mal. Comme à l'ordinaire Comme ci comme ça . Parlez- vous français? Do you speak French ? Un peu. A little. Un petit peu. A little bit. Un tout petit peu. Just a little bit. Comprenez- vous ? Do you understand? Je comprends. I understand. Je ne comprends pas. I do not understand. Oui, monsieur. Yes, sir. Non, monsieur. No, sir. S'il vous plaît. If you please. Merci. Thank you. Merci bien. Thank you very much. Merci beaucoup. Many thanks. Je vous remercie. I thank you. Je vous suis bien obligé. I am very much obliged to you. Du tout ; (or) de rien. Il n'y a pas de quoi. A votre service. Au revoir. Au plaisir de vous revoir. Bonsoir. Bonne nuit. A demain. I/undi (lûn-dee). Mardi (mar-dee). Mercredi (mair-krû-dee). Jeudi (zhud-dee). Vendredi (vông-drud-dee) Samedi (sôm-dee). Dimanche (dee-môngsh). Very well, thank you; how are you? Pretty well, thank you. Not so bad (not too badly). As usual. So, so ! Not at all. Don't mention it. At your service (you are welcome). Good bye (till we meet again). Good bye (till I see you again). Good evening. Good night. Till to-morrow. Monday. Tuesday. Wednesday. Thursday. Friday. Saturday. Sunday. 32 Practical French Course QUATRIEME LEÇON, LESSON IV. USUAL PHRASES. Comment se porte votre père. (* Il se porte bien, merci. Comment se porte votre mari ? votre fils? votre frère ? votre oncle ? votre neveu? votre cousin ? votre ami ? Comment se porte votre mère ? Elle se porte bien, merci. Comment se porte votre dame ? " " " votre femme? How is your father? He is welly thank you. How is How is Hoiv is How is Ho7v is How is How is your husband? your son ? your brother? your uncle ? your nephew ? your cousin ? your friend ? How is your mother f She is well, thank you. How is your wife? {polite.') How is your wife ? (familiar.) Comment se porte votre sœur? votre fille? votre belle-sœur? votre belle- fille? votre tante ? votre nièce ? votre cousine? votre amk- ? How is your sister/ How is your daughter? How is your sister-in-law? How is your daughter-in-law? How is your aunt ? I !<<:c is your niece t How is your (lady) cousin t How is your (lady) friend ? (*) In polite conversation we say : Comment se porte monsieur votre père ? Comment se porte madame votre mère? Practical French Course; 33 Comment se portent vos enfants ? Ils se portent bien, merci. Comment se portent vos sœurs ? Elles se portent bien, merci. Comment va-t-on chez vous ? Tout le monde va bien, merci. Comment vont les affaires ? Tout doucement. Que dites- vous de nouveau ? Pas grand 'chose. Dites-moi quelque chose en fran- çais, voulez- vous? Je ne sais que dire. Essayez. Fermez la porte. Ouvrez la fenêtre. Montez le store. Baissez le store. Allumez le gaz. Eteignez le gaz. Venez. Venez ici. Venez avec moi. Venez encore. Venez bientôt. Allez. Allez-vous-en. Tout de suite. Dépêchez- vous. How are your children f They are well, thank you. How are your sisters ? They are well, thank you. How are all at home ? Everybody is well, thank you. How is business . Rather slow. What is the news . Nothing much. Tell me something in French, will you? I do not know what to say. Try. Shut the door. Open the window. Raise the shade. Lower the shade. Light the gas. Turn off the gas. Come. Come here. Come with me. Come again. Come soon. Go. Go away. At once. Hurry up. 34 Practical French Course Ecoutez. Ecoutez-moi. Attendez. Attendez-moi. Attendez une minute. Pardonnez-moi. Je vous demande pardon. Excusez-moi. Certainement. Vous parlez trop vite. Parlez plus lentement. Répétez, s'il vous plaît. Comment dit-on en français " Jî uary ? ' ' On dit : janvier (zhôn-vee-ay). Février (fay-vree-ay). February. Mars (mars). March. Avril (ah-vrill). April. Mai (may). May. Juin (zlnvang). /une. Juillet (zhwee-yay). July. Août (oo or oot). August. Septembre (sep-tôm-br). September» Octobre (ôc-ton-br). October. Novembre | noh-vÔm-br). November. Décembre ( day-sôm-br). December. Le printemps (*) (k-r-prâii^-tông), ( The) Spring. Su m »/< i . L'été (lay-tay). L'automne (loh-tone). Autumn. L'biver (lee-vair >. Winter. Avez-vous compris? Hare you understood f Je pense que oui. I think so. C'est bien. All right. Listen. Listen to me. Wait. Wait for me. Wait a minute. Pardon me. I beg your pardon. Excuse me. Certainly. }'ou speak too fast. Speak slower. Repeat, if you please. How do they say January in French ? They say : ' "janvier." (*) In French the names of the days, months and seasons are written with a small initial, only the proper names being written with a capital. Practtcai, French Course; 35 CINQUIEME LEÇON. LESSON Y. Le Temps (1er tong) — The weather. In relation to the weather and also in some idiomatic expressions the verb faire, to make, is used impersonally in the same manner as the English verb to be. However, the verb être, to be, is used when the word temps, weather, precedes it. Thus, for instance, one may say either "Il fait beau temps," it is fine weather; or : "Le temps est beau," the weather is fine. Quel temps f ait-il ? Il fait beau temps. Il fait mauvais temps Il fait chaud. Il fait froid. Il fait frais. Il fait lourd. Il fait humide. Il fait du brouillard. Il fait du vent. Il fait de la poussière. Il fait mauvais marcher. Il fait sombre. Il fait du soleil. Il fait clair de lune. Il fait un beau clair de lune. How is the weather? ( What weather makes it ?) It is {it makes') fine weather. It is {it makes) bad weather. It is warm. It is cold. It is cool. It is sultry {heavy). It is damp. It is foggy. It is windy. It is dusty. It is bad walking. It is dark. It is sunny. It is moonlight. It is a beautiftd moonlight. 36 Practical French Course Il fait jour. Il fait nuit. It is daylight. It is night. Le temps est couvert. Le temps est menaçant. Le temps~est orageux. The weather is cloudy. The -weather is threatet The weather is stormy. Il fait des éclairs. Il tonne. It is lightning. It thunders. Il pleut. Il pleut à verse. It is raining ; it rains. It pours. Il gèle. Il dégèle. It freezes. It thaws. INTERROGATIVE FORM. The interrogation is formed in French, either by placing the pronoun after the verb with a hyphen connecting them or by prefixing the expression est-ce que, is it that, to the affirmative form. The form est-ce que, is generally used in conversation and familiar writing. Kxamplks : Fait-il chaud ? or Est-ce qu'il fait chaud ? Pleut-il? or Kst-ce qu'il pleut /.s it warm ? /s it raining f NEGATIVE FORM. To render a sentence negative in French, ne is placed before the verb and pas after it. Examples : II ne i ait pas chaud. i // is not "warm. Il ne fait pas froid. // is not cold. Il ne pleut pas. ' // is not raining. the particle Practical French Course L'heure (lur)—T/te time (the hour). Quelle heure est-il ? What time (hour) is it f 37 Il est une heure. " " deux heures. " " trois heures. " " quatre heures. " " cinq heures. " " six heures. " " sept heures. " " huit heures. " " neuf heures, (nûvûr). " " dix heures. " " onze heures. Il est midi. (*) Il^est minuit. Il est tard. Il^est de bonne heure. It is one (hour) o'clock. " two o'clock. " three o' clock. " four o'clock. " five o'clock. " six o'clock. " seven o'clock. " eight o' clock. " nine o'clock. " ten o'clock. " eleven o'clock. It is twelve o'clock (mid-day). It is twelve o' 'clock (mid-nighf). It is late. It is early. (*) Douze heures is never used except in the sense of twelve hours. Il est une heure et cinq. "et dix. (dees). et quart, (car), et vingt. et vingt-cinq, et demie. Il est deux heures moins vingt-cinq. " " " " moins vingt. " " " " moins un quart. " " " " moins dix. " " " " moins cinq. Suis- je en avance ? Suis- je en retard ? Vous êtes en avance. Vous~êtes~enretard. It is five (minutes) past one. " ten (minutes) past one. ' ' a quarter past one. ' ' twenty (minutes) past one. " twenty-five (minutes) past one. " half -past one. It is twenty-five (minutes) of two. ' ' twen ty (min utes) of two. " a quarter of two, " ten (minutes) of two. " five (minutes) of two. Am I early ? Am Hate? You are early. You are late. 38 Practical French Course Votre montre avance. Votre pendule retarde. C'est l'heure juste. Your watch is fast. Your clock is slow. It is the correct time. Le présent (ler-pray-zông) — The present. Le passé (ler-pah-say) — The past. L'avenir (lav-neer)— The future. Aujourd'hui (oh-zhoor-dwee). Maintenant (mànt-nông). A présent. Ce matin (ser-mah-tâng). This morning. Cet après-midi (set-ah-pray-mee- This afternoon. dee). Ce soir (ser swahr). This evening (or) to-night. Hier (ye-air). ) 'esterday. Avant-hier | ali-vôn-tee-air). ( The day) before yesterday. Lundi passé. Last Monday. La semaine passée Last week. Le mois passé. Last month. L'an passé (long-pah-say). Last year. Demain i der-m&ng . Après demain. Lundi prochain proh-shàng). La semaine prochaine (proh-shân ). Le mois prochain. L'an prochain. To-day. Now. At present. To-morrow. ( The day) after to-morrow. Next Monday. Next week. Next month. Next year. t^*3*? Practical French Course 39 SIXIEME LEÇON. LESSON VI. TI-fE INDEFINITE ARTICLE. The indefinite article a is rendered in French by : Un before a masculine noun. Ex. : un garçon, a boy. Une before a feminine noun. Ex. : une fille, a girl. PRACTICE. Qu'avez-vous fait aujourd'hui; J'ai lu le journal. J'ai écrit une lettre. J'ai pris un bain. J'ai fait une promenade. J'ai fait une visite. J'ai fait des emplettes. What have you done to-day i I have read the newspaper. I have written a letter. I have taken a bath. I have taken a walk. I have paid a visit. I have made some purchases. Qu'avez-vous acheté? (or) ) Qu'est-ce que^ vonsavezacheté ?} What have you bought ? J'ai acheté, (masculine nouns.) Un costume, a suit. Un chapeau, a hat. Un pardessus, an overcoat. Un gilet, a vest. Un corsage, a shirt-waist. Un jupon, a petticoat. Un bracelet, a bracelet. I have bought. (FEMININE NOUNS.) Une robe, a gown. Une voilette, a veil. Une ceinture, a belt. Une jaquette, a jacket. Une montre, a watch. Une pendule, a clock. Une bague, a ring. 40 Practical French Course Un éventail, a fan. Un parapluie, an umbrella. Un tapis, a carpet. Un fauteuil, an arm-chair. Un sofa, a sofa. Un canapé, a couch. Un couteau, a knife. Un canif, a penknife. Un crayon, a pencil. Un encrier, an inkstand. Un'cheval, a horse. Un chien, a dog. Une cravate, a necktie. Une casquette, a cap. Une malle, a trunk. Une valise, a valise. Une canne, a cane. Une table, a table. Une chaise, a chair. Une cuillère, a spoon. Une fourchette, a fork. Une assiette, a plate. Une~maison, a house. Une bicyclette, a bicycle. collective nouns. Une paire de gants. Une paire de bas. Une paire de chaussettes. Une paire de jarretières. Une paire de souliers. Une paire de bottines. Une paire de pantoufles. Une paire de caoutchoucs. Une douzaine de mouchoirs. Une douzaine de chemises. Une douzaine de cols. Une douzaine de manchettes. Une livre de sucre. Une boîte de bonbons. Une bouteille de Inert.-. Un mètre de dentelle. A pair of gloves. A pair of stockings. A pair of socks. A pair of garters. A pair of shoes. A paii- of button-shoes, A pair of slippers. A pair of rubbers A dozen (of) handkerchiefs. A dozen (of) shirts. A dozen (of) collars. A dozen (of) cuffs. A pound of sugar. A />ox of candies. . I hot t le of />(■<■>: A yard of lace. COMPOrNP NOUNS. J'ai acheté aussi: — Un lit-pliant. Un timbre-poste. Un tire-bouchon. I have also bought: A folding-bed. A postage-stamp. A cork-screw. Practical French Course 41 Un tourne-vis. Un coupe-papier. Un gratte-papier. Un presse-papier. Un porte-plume. Un porte-monnaie. Une chaise-berçante. Une machine à coudre. Quoi encore ? (or) Quoi de plus ? Rien de plus, (or) Plus rien. C'est tout. C'est assez. Combien avez- vous payé ? J'ai payé vingt francs. C'est cher. Ce n'est pas cher. C'est bon marché. C'est très bon marché. A screw -driver. A paper-knife. An eraser. A paper-weight. A pen-holder. A pocket-book. A rocking-chair. A sewing-machine. What else? Nothing else. That is all. That is enough. How much have you paid f I have paid 20 francs. It is dear. It is not dear. It is cheap. It is very cheap. OBSERVATIONS. I. The article un (m), une (f), is not used in French be- tween the verb to be and a noun denoting a profession or a nationality. Il est médecin. Il est français, (adj.) He is a physician. He is a Frenchman (French 2. The article un, une, is, however, used after c'est, it is (or) that is, and also when an adjective determines the noun. He is and she is are generally rendered by c'est before a substantive or adjective used substantively. C'est un médecin. C'est un Français, (subst.) C'estune Française. He is a physician. He is a Frenchman. She is a French-woman. 42 Practical French Course C'est un bon élève, (m.) u \ C'est une bonne élève, (f.) (f.) He is a good pupil. She is a good pupil . 3. The indefinite article is not used in French, the preposition sans {without), before a substantive. after Sans faute. Sans guide. Sans maître. Without a mistake. Without a guide. U 'ithout a master. 4. The indefinite article is omitted in French, in ex- clamatory sentences. What a fine day ! Quel beau jour ! in. | Quel dommage ! Quel imbecile ! Quelfe belle nuit! - f. 1 Quelle bonte ! Quelle cbance ! What a pity ! What a fool ! What a fine night . What a shame ! What [a) luck ! 5. The article un, une, is not used in French with nouns of measure or weight, but is replaced by the article le (m), la (f), the: What is the price .' Quel est le prix ? l'n Franc le metre. Deux francs la livre. One franc a meter. Two francs a pound. 6. When speaking of time, the indefinite article a translated by par {per.) Vingt francs par jour. Vingt francs par semaine. Vingt francs par mois. Vingt francs par an. Twenty francs a day. Twenty francs a week. Twenty fruncs a month. Twenty francs a year. Practical French Course EXERCISE. 43 Let the pupil replace each dash by the requisite word, both orally and in writing. i. Qu'as- tu fait? (familiar) or: Qu'est-ce que tu as fait ? J'ai -■ 2. Qu'a-t-il fait? or : Qu'est-ce qu'il a fait ? Ila . 3. Qu'a-t-elle fait? or : Qu'est-ce qu'elle a fait? Elle a . 4. Qu'ont-ils fait ? (m.) or : Qu'est-ce qu'ils ont fait? Ils ont . 5. Qu'ont-elles fait? (f ) or : Qu'est-ce qu'elles ont fait? Elles ont . 6. Qu'avez- vous lu ? or : ? J'ai -j 7. Qu'avez- vous écrit? or: ? Nous avons . 8. Qu'a-t-elle acheté ? or : ? Ellea . 9. Combien a-t-elle payé ? or : Combien est-ce qu'elle ? Elle a . 10. Combien avez- vous payé ? or : Combien est-ce que vous ? J'ai . 1. What hast thou done ? or lit. : What is it that thou hast done I have read the newspaper. 2. What has he done ? or lit. : What is it that he has done ? He has taken a walk. 3. What has she done ? or lit. : What is it that she has done ? She has paid a visit. 4. What have they done ? or lit. : What is it that they have done ? They have taken a bath. 5.. What have they done? or lit. : What is it that they have done ? They have made some purchases 6. What have you read? or lit. : What is it that you have read ? I have read the newspaper. 7. What have you written ? or lit. : What is it that you havewritten We have -written twenty letters 8. What has she bought ? or lit. : What is it that she has bought ? She has bought a dozen hand- kerchiefs. ç. How much has she paid ? or lit. : How much is it that she has paid? She has paid eleven francs. 10. How much have you paid? or lit. : How much is it that you have paid? I have paid ten dollars. 44 Tractical French Course SEPTIEME LEÇON. LESSON VIL THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. I. The definite article the is rendered in French by: Le before a masculine noun, singular. Ex. : le père, the father. La before a feminine noun, singular. Ex.: la mère, the mother. Les before a plural noun, either gender. Ex.: les enfants. the children. 2. Before a word beginning with a vowel or a silent h, the letter e or a is, for the sake of euphony, omitted and replaced by an apostrophe. [/'ami, the friend, instead of le ami. L'homme, the matt, " le homme. L'eau, the -water, " la eau. L'histoire, the history, " la histoire. 3. The article, in French, must be repeated before each noun with which it has to agree in gender and number. Le père, la mère et les infants: the father, mother and children. 4. The article must be used in French Before the names of countries. Ex. : la France. Before the titles prefixed to names. Ex.: le docteur X. Before the names of aeasona Kx.: le printemps. Before each noun used in a general sense. Ex.: le pain, bread; levin, wine; la gloire, glory ; la vertu, virtue. Practical French Course 45 5. The article is omitted in French before the ordinal number designating a sovereign or chapter. Napoléon premier, Napoleon the first. Chapitre premier, Chapter the first. PRACTICE. Que désirez- Passez-moi, Voulez-vous le pain, the bread. le beurre, the butter. le jambon, the ham. le poulet, the chicken. le poisson, the fish. le rôti, the roast. le fromage, the cheese. le sel, the salt. le poivre, the pepper. le vinaigre, the vinegar. vous ? What do you wish ? s'il vous plaît. Pass me, if you please. me passer ? Will you pass me ? la soupe, the soup. la viande, the meat. la sauce, the sauce. la moutarde, the mustard. la salade, the salad. la glace, the ice. la bouteille, the bottle. la carafe, the decanter. l'eau, the water. l'huile, the oil. les radis, the radishes. les olives, the olives. les pois, the peas. les haricots, the beans. les tomates, the tomatoes. les concombres, the cucumbers. les pommes de terre, the potatoes. les fraises, the strawberries. les pommes, the apples. les raisins, the grapes. Vous avez l'air malade ! (idiom) You look ill ! Je ne suis pas bien. ha. tête me fait mal. Les dents me font mal. / am not well. The (my) head hurts me. The (my) teeth hurt me. Tracticai, French Course Qu'est-ce qui vous fait mal ? (kes-key-voo-f ay-mahl. ) What hurts you ? Lit. : What is it that makes you ill ? Le front, the forehead. Le nez, the nose. La bouche, the mouth. Le menton, the chin. La langue, the tongue. La gorge, the throat. Le cou, the neck. L'estomae, the stomach. La poitrine, the chest. Le cœur, the heart. Le dos, the back. Les oreilles, the ears. Les~yeux, the eyes. Lesgencives, the gums. Les lèvres, the lips. Les épaules, the shoulders. Les'bras, the arms. Les mains, the hands. Les doigts, the fingers. Les jambes, the legs. Les genoux, the knees. Les pieds, the feet. Tant pis ! So much the worse! J'en suis très fâché pour vous. / am very sorry for you. REMARK. After the verb aimer, to like, the substantive or adjective used substantively must be preceded in French by the article le, la, les, according to the gender and number of the noun: J'aime le vin. J'aime la bière. J'aime les fraisea J'aime le français. J'aime l'anglais. J'aime le blanc. j'aime le ronge. J'aime le rose. J'aime le bien. Aimez-vous le vin? (m.) Oui. je l'aime. / like wine, I like beer. I like strawberries. / like French (language), I like English. I like while. I like red. I like pink. f like blue. Do you like winef Yes, I like it. Practical French Course 47 Aimez- vous la bière ? (f.) Oui, je l'aime. Aimez- vous les fraises? Oui, je les aime beaucoup. Pays (pay-ee) Countries. 1/ Europe, Europe. L'Amérique, America. La France, France. L'Angleterre, England. L'Allemagne, Germany. L'Autriche, Austria. La Russie, Russia. L'Espagne, Spain. L'Italie, Italy. La Belgique, Belgium. ~L,a. Suisse, Switzerland. L'Irlande, Ireland. L'Ecosse, Scotland. La Suède, Sweden. La Norvège, Norway. Le Danemark, Denmark. La Grèce, Greece. La Turquie, Turkey. La Chine, China. Le Japon, Japan. Le Caûada, Canada. Le Mexique, Mexico. Les Etats-Unis, the United States. L'Amérique du Sud, South [America. Do you like beer ? Yes. I like it. Do you like strawberries ? Yes, I like them very much. Nationalités, Nationalities. Les Européens, the Emopeans. Les Américains, the Americans. Les Français, the French. Les Anglais, the English. Les Allemands, the Germans. Les Autrichiens, the Austrians. Les Russes, the Russians. Les Espagnols, the Spanish. Les Italiens, the Italians. Les Belges, the Belgians. Les Suisses, the Swiss. Les Irlandais, the Irish. Les Ecossais, the Scotch. Les Suédois, the Swedes. Les Norvégiens, the Norwegians. Les Danois, the Danes. Les Grecs, the Greeks. Les Turcs, the Turks. Les Chinois, the Chinese. Les Japonais, the Japanese. Les Canadiens, the Canadians. Les Mexicains, the Mexicans. Le nord, the North; l'est, the East. Le sud, the South ; l'ouest, [the West. EXERCISE. Let the pupil replace each dash by the requisite article, adjective or adjective used substantively. 48 Practical French Course livre (m.), the book. livres (pi.), the books. âme (f.), the soul. plancher (m.), the floor. plafond (m.), the ceiling. rue (f.), the street. avenue (f.), the avenue. mur (m.), the wall. toit (m.), the roof. — ciel (m.), the sky. — lune (f.), the moon. — soleil (m.), the sun. — étoiles (pi.), the stars. — dictionnaire (m.), the dictionary. — miroir (m.), the mirror. — souliers (pi.), the shoes. — argent (m.), the silver (money). — or (m.), the gold. 2. He is English. 11 est — He is an Englishman. C'est Il est — He is (an) American. He is an American. C'est Il est — He is Irish. He is an Irishman. C'est He is Spanish. Il est — He is a Spaniard. C'est 3. Do you like pears ? Aimez-vous — poires? Do you like cherries? Aimez-vous — cerises? Do you like (the) theatre? Aimez-vous — théâtre? (m.) Do you like music ? Aimez-vous musique? (f.) Do you like raspberries? Aimez-vous — framboises? Do you like green ? (color.) Aimez- vous vert ? Do you like grey ? Aimez-vous gris ? Do you like black ? Aimez- vous noir ? I to \<>u like Prance? Aimez- vous Je — aime. — France? I like it. I like them very much. Je — aime — Present Indicative of AIMER, to like. J'aime, / like. Tu aimes, thou likest. Il aime, he likes. Elle aime, she likes. Nous aimons, we life. Vous aimez, you like. Ils aiment, they like. Elles aiment, they like. Practical French Course; 49 HUITIEME LEÇON. LESSON VIII. CONTRACTION OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. I. — Genitive or Possessive Case. Singular. i. Before a masculine noun, singular, beginning with a consonant, of the is rendered by du, which is a contraction of de le. Du père, of the father, instead of de le père. Du frère, of the brother, " de le frère. 2. Before a feminine noun; singular, beginning with a consonant, of the is translated literally by de la. De la mère, of the mother. De la sœur, of the sister. 3. Before a masculine or feminine noun, singular, be- ginning with a vowel or an h mute, of the is rendered, for the sake of euphony, by de 1'. De l'enfant, of the child, instead of du enfant. De l'homme, of the man, " du homme. De 1'armoe, of the army, " de la armée. De l'histoire, of the history, " de la histoire. 50 Practical French Course Plural. Before a plural noun of either gender, of the is rendered by des, which is a contraction of de les. Des enfants, of the children, instead of de les enfants. Des années, of the armies, " de les années. HOW TO CONSTRUCT A SENTENCE IN THE POSSESSIVE CASE. In French the name of the possessor always follows the name of the object possessed. Thus, for instance, " Peter's father " must be translated : Le père de Pierre, the fat he* r of Peter. La mère de Jean. Le livre du professeur. La grammaire de l'élève. La sœur de la modiste. Les jouets des enfants. John's mother. The professor's book. The pupil's g raw mar. The milliner's sister. The children's playthings. REMARK. From the is rendered, as of the, by du, de la, des, accord- ing to the gender and number of the noun to which it refers. D'où venez- \. Je viens du parc, m. ) Je viens du théâtre. Je viens de la einipa^ne. (i.) Je viens de la Unique. Je viens des Philippine Where do you come from f I tome from the park. I c o m e front the theatre. I come from the country. I come from the bank. I come from tke Philippines. Practical French Course 51 II.— Dative Case. Singular. i. Before a masculine noun, singular, beginning with a consonant, to the is rendered by au, which is a contraction of à le. Au père, to the father, instead of à le père. Au frère, to the brother, " à le frère. 2. Before a feminine noun, singular, beginning with a consonant, to the is translated literally by à la. A la mère, to the mother. A la sœur, to the sister. 3. Before a noun of either gender beginning with a vowel or h mute, to the is rendered, for the sake of euphony, by à 1' A l'enfant, to the child, instead of au enfant. A l'ami, to the friend, " au ami. A l'homme, to the man, " au homme. A l'ennemi, to the enemy, " au ennemi. A l'armée, to the army, " à la armée. PLURAL. Before a plural noun of either gender to the is rendered by aux, which is a contraction of à les. Aux enfants, to the children, instead of à les enfants. Aux amis, to the friends, " à les amis. Aux hommes, to the men, ' ' à les hommes. Aux ennemis, to the enemies, ' ' à les ennemis. Aux~armées. to the armies. " à les armées. 52 Practical French Course Où allez-vous? PRACTICE. Where are you going f Je vais au parc, (m.) Je vais au théâtre. Je vais au restaurant. Je vais au bal. Je vais au lit. Je vais'à l'hôtel de ville. Je vais à la campagne, t. Je vais à la banque. Je vais à la poste. Je vais à la pharmacie Je vais à la cour. Je vais à l'école. Je \.iis~à l'église. I am going to the park. I am going to the theatre. I am going to the restaurant. I am going to the ball. I am going to bed. I am going to the city hall. I am going to the country. I am going to the bank. F am going to the postoffi-ce. 4ng to the dt~ug store, f am going to court. I am going to school. I am going to chunh. REMARKS ABOl'T THK PROPOSITION To. i. After the verb aller, to go, the preposition to is ren- dered by : F!n before tlie names of countries ending with a mute e, and by Au before the names of countries ending otherwise than with a mute e. Où alle/.-vous : Je vais en Kurope. Je vais en France. Je \ai- au Canada. Je vais au Japon. Who,- are you goimgf Tarn going to Europe, I am going to France. 1 a it going lo Canada. I am going to f^pun. 2. 1 lowever, we say : à Cuba, to Cuba, aud au Mexique, to Me I Û». Practical French Course 53 2. After the verb aller, to go, and before the name of a city the preposition to is rendered in French by à. Où allez-vous ? Je vais à Paris Je vais à Londres. Where are you going ? I am going to Paris. I am going to London 3. After the verb aller, to go, and before another verb in the infinitive, the preposition to is not translated in French. Où allez vous ? Where are you going ? Je vais faire une promenade. Je vais faire une visite. Je vais prendre un bain. Je vais prendre le tramway. Je vais lire le journal. Je vais écrire une lettre. Je vais voir mon ami. / am going to take a walk. I am going to pay a visit. I am going to take a bath. I am going to take the car. I am going to read the newspaper. I am going to write a letter. I am going to see my friend. IMPORTANT REMARK on The word Home. In French there is no word corresponding to the Eng- glish word home. Home is translated by the preposition chez meaning at (or) to the house of. Je vais chez moi. Je vais chez vous. Je vais chez le dentiste. 1. Où vas-tu? (familiar) Je vais (m. ) / am going home. I am going to your house. I am going to the dentist's. EXERCISE. Où allez- vous ? Nous allons — (f.) Où va-t-il ? Il va (verb) Where art thou going ? I am going Where are yoti going ? We are going Where is he going f He is going 54 Practical French Course 4. Où va-t-elle ? Elle va" (f.) 5. Où vont-ils? Ils vont" (f.) 6. Où est-il allé ? Il est allé' (m.) 7. Où est-elle allée ? Elle est allée 8. Où sont-ils allés? Ils sontalles — le docteur. 9. Où irez-vous demain ? J'irai — — ni. Nous irons (f.) 10. Il faut que j'aille Il faut que j'aille Il faut que j'aille Il faut que j'aille il. Qu'allez-vous faire? Qu'est-ce que ■ ? je vais prendre - leçon t.: Je vais étudier 12. Allez Allons 4. Where is she going ? She is going 5. Where are they going? They are going 6. Where did he go ? He -went 7. // Itère did she go ? She went U 'here did they go ? They went to the doctor's. 1). Where will you go to-morrow? I shall go lie will go — — — / must go home. I must go to I he doctor's. I must go to the dentist's. I must go to ll'anamaker's. 11. \\ hat are you fOXHg to do .' f I am going to take my lesson. I am going to study my lesson /.-. Go to church. Let us go to the theatre. Present Indicative of ALLER, to go; VENIR, to come. Je vais, I go [am going). Tu vas, thou . Il \a, / Nous allons, -we go. Vous allez, you go. Ils vont, they go. Je viens, / come (am coming). Tu viens, thou contest. Il vient, he circs. Nous venons, r. v come. Vous venez, you come. Ils viennent, (hey come. Practical French Course 55 NEUVIEME LEÇON. LESSON IX. THE PARTITIVE ARTICLE. I. The English adjective some or any, which we call in French article partitif (partitive article), is rendered by Du, before a masculine noun, singular. Ex. : du pain, some bread. De la, before a feminine noun, singular. Ex. : de la soupe, some soup. Des, before a plural noun, either gender. Ex.: des pommes, some apples. Before a noun beginning with a vowel or h mute, the partitive article du, de la, is changed, for the sake of euphony, into de 1'. Thus, we say : De l'argent, {some) money, instead of du argent. De l'or, " gold, " du or. De l'eau, " water, " de la eau. De l'huile, " oil, " de la huile. 3. Nouns used in a partitive sense are always preceded in French by the article du, de la or des when the sentence is affirmative : J'ai mangé du pain, du beurre, I / have eaten bread, butter, salad de la salade et des fraises. I and strawberries. 4. The partitive article du (m.), de la (f.), des (pi.)» * s not used after a negation, but the preposition de, (of). 56 Practical French Course Avez- vous du vin ? J'ai du vin. Je n'ai pas de vin. Avez- vous de la bière? J'ai de la bière. Je n'ai pas de bière. Avez- vous des allumettes? J'ai des allumettes. Je n'ai point (*) d'allumettes. Have you any winet I have some wine. I have no (or not any) wine. Have you any beer* I have some beer. I have no beer. Have you any matches ? I have some matches. I have no matches (at all). (*) Point is more exclusive than pas. 5. When the noun taken in a partitive sense is preceded by an adjective, the preposition de (of) is employed instead of the partitive article du, de la, des. However, the use of the latter has recently been author- ized by an official decision of the Minister of Public In- struction. J'ai de boo vin. Il a de bonne bière. Bue a de belles robes. f have good -wine He has good beer. She has beautiful gowns. 6. When the noun and adjective are so connected that they form a compound noun, the partitive article must be used instead of the preposition de. Thus, we say : Des jeunes gens. Des jeunes filles. Young men. Young /aiiics. 7. The partitive article du, de la, des is not employed after an adverb of quantity, but only the preposition de. Practical French Course 57 Beaucoup de monde. Beaucoup d'argent. Assez de place. Trop de bruit. Combien de fois ? Many people (a great number of). Much money (a large quantity of). Enough room. Too much noise. How many times ? IMPORTANT REMARK. When the English word some is used, not in a partitive sense, but as an indefinite adjective, it is translated into French by quelque for the singular and quelques for the plural. Quelque jour. Quelques jours. Quelques oranges. Quelque chose. Quelquefois. Some day. Some {or a few) days. Some {or a few) oranges. Something. Sometimes. PRACTICE. Avez- vous dîné ? Have you dined? Pas encore. Not yet. Avez-vous déjeuné ? Have you had breakfast Oui, j'ai déjeuné. Yes, I have. A quelle heure ? At what time? A huit heures. At eight o'clock. Qu'avez- vous mangé? {or) ) Qu'est-ce que vous avez mangé ? \ What have -^ eaten ? J'ai mangé, I have eaten : 53 Practical French Course du pain, bread. du beurre, butter. du poulet, chicken. du poisson, fish. du fromage, cheese. de la soupe, soup. de la viande, meat. de la salade, salad. de la crème, cream. de l'omelette, omelet. des huîtres, oysters. despêches, peaches. des prunes, plums. des noix, ««/s. des figues, _/fg\y. Qu 'avez- vous bu? {or) > Qu'est-ce que vous avez bu ? ) ]Vhat **** drtnk * J'ai bu, I drank : A glass of wine. Un verre de vin. Un verre de bière. Un verre de lait. Un verre de limonade. Une tasse de café. Une tasse de café au lait. Une tasse de thé. Est-ce tout? (ess-too. ) Oui, c'e.-.t tout. ; sas -too. / C'est assez. < say-tah-say.) .-/ glass of beer. A glass of milk. A glass of lemonade. A cup of coffee. A cup of coffee with milk. A cup of tea. Is that all f Yes, that is all. That is enough. What do you wish T Que Go and bring me : Allez me chercher : some soap. — savon, (m.) some wood. — bois, (m.) some coal. — charbon, i'm.) some hot water. eau chaude Cf.) a towel. . — essuie-main (m.) 60 Practical French Course DIXIEME LEÇON, LESSON X. I. — How to form Questions. The auxiliary verb to do, used in English to ask a ques- tion, is never used in French. The interrogation is formed according to the following rules : i. If the subject of the sentence is a personal pronoun, it is simply placed after the verb with a hyphen connecting them. Comprenez- vous ? Pensez-vous ? Savez- vous ? Do you understand? {Lit.: f'n- dérstandyou .') Do you think? {Lit.: Think you f) Do you know t ( L it. : Know you /) 2. If the subject of the sentence is a noun, the noun is placed before the verb, and the corresponding pronoun is repeated after the verb. Votre frère est-il marié? Lit.: Your brother, is he married .' Votre Bœures£elle à la maison f Lit.: Your sister, is she at hornet Vos parents sunt ils à la maison? Lit.: Your parents, aie they at [home ? 3. A euphonic t between two hyphens is inserted be- tween the verb and the pronoun when the verb, in the third person singular, ends with a vowel. Votre ami a-t-il écrit ? Votre mari parle-t-il français? Votre dame parle-t-elle anglais ? Lit.: Your friend, has he -written f Lit.: Your husband, speaks he L it. : ) 'our wife, speaks she [English T Practicai, French Course 61 4. When the verb, in the first person singular of the in- dicative present, ends with a mute e, it is better to use the interrogative form est=ce que, is it that. Est-ce que je prononce bien ? I Do I pronounce well ? Est-ce que je parle correctement ? | Do I speak correctly ? . 5. The interrogative form annexed to a proposition varies in English, but in French it is invariably rendered by the expression n'est>ce pas, is it not {so~) ? Vous êtes français, n'est-ce pas? Vous comprenez, n'est-ce pas? Vous avez compris, n'est-ce pas ' Il fait chaud, n'est-ce pas? Il est riche, n'est-ce pas ? Elle est jolie, n'est-ce pas ? Vous viendrez, n'est-ce pas? C'est entendu, n'est-ce pas? You are French, are you not ? You understand, do you not? You have understood, have you not? It is warm, is it not? He is rich, is he not ? She is pretty, is she not ? You will come, will you not? It is understood, is it not ? 6. The interrogative expression n'est=ce pas is some- times used in the beginning of the sentence. It is then followed by que, that. N'est-ce pas qu'elle est jolie? I She is pretty, is she not? N'est-ce pas que c'est beau? | It is fine, is it not? II — How to form Answers. 1. An answer in French must be explicit. It cannot, therefore, as in English, consist merely of the auxiliary verb preceded by a nominative pronoun, as Are you tired? I am. — Do you understand ? I do. Have you understood ? I have. — Will you come ? I will. Practical French Course The sentence in French must be complete in the answer as well as in the question. Therefore, the above examples must be translated as follows : Etes- vous fatigué ? Comprenez-vous ? Avez- vous compris ? Viendrez-vous? Oui, je suis fatigué. Oui, je comprends. Oui, j'ai compris. Oui, je viendrai. 2. The neuter pronoun le (//) is, however, generally used in an answer as a substitute for an adjective or a noun, thus preventing their repetition. The pronoun le is placed before the auxiliary verb. Etes- vous prêt ? (m.) (pray.) Oui, je le suis. Ces deux garçons sont-ils frères ? Oui, ils le sont. Arc you ready f Yes, I {it) am. Are those (wo boys brothers t Vies, they air. IMPORTANT REMARK. The word si is often used as an adverb of affirmation in the sense oiyes. Si must be used in answers to a negative question or assertion; oui in plain answers. EStes-vous fatigué ' Oui, je le suis. N'êtea-vous pas fatigué? SI, je le suis. Comprenci- voua ? Oui, je comprends. Nt- comprenez-vous pas? SI, je comprends. Vous ne c o m p renez pas ! Si. je c o mprend». Mais m, je com p rends (or) Si fait, j<- co mpre nds. ( Afore emphatic.) . he you tii rit .' VeS, I am. Air you not tired f Yes, I am. Do you understand ? ) ; s. i do. /'.' you not understand? )', t, / understand. You do not understand ! Yes, I do. Why yes, I understand. Yes, I do understand. Practical French Course 63 III. — How to form Negative Sentences. I. To render a sentence negative in French the particle ne, as already stated, is placed before the verb, and pas after it. Je comprends. f I understand. Je ne comprends pas. I I do not understand. 2 Before a verb beginning with a vowel or a mute h, the e of ne is omitted for the sake of euphony and replaced by an apostrophe. Je n'ai pas. I have not. Il n'a pas. He has not. Je n'aime pas. / do not like. 3. If there is a pronoun joined to the verb, the particle ne precedes the pronoun. Je ne vous comprends pas. Je ne l'aime pas. Je ne les aime pas. / do not understand you. I do not like him, her, or it. I do not like them. 4. When a negative sentence is used interrogatively the negative pas must be placed after the pronoun. Ne suis- je pas ? Am I not ? N'ai-je pas ? Have I not ? Ne comprenez- vous pas ? Do you not understand f 5. When the negative words rien, nothing ; jamais, never ; point, none; personne, no one, nobody ; nulle part, nowhere ; octur in a sentence, they take the place of pas. 64 Practical French Course Je ne sais rien. Je ne fume jamais. Je n'ai point d'argent. Je ne connais personne. Je n'irai nulle part. I I know nothing. I never smoke. I have no money. I know no one. I shall go nowhere. 6. If the verb is understood, the negative is expressed by a single word, the particle ne being used only when the verb is expressed. Have you dined t — Not yet. Do you smoke? — Never, Who has (is) comet — Nobody. H 'here are you going f — Nozvhere. How many? — Not any. Avez- vous dîné? — Pas encore l'unie/- vous? Jamais. Qui est venu ? Personne. Où allez-vous ? Nulle part. Combien ? — Point. 7. When the verb is in a compound tense ; the second part of the negation is placed between the auxiliary and the past participle. However, the negative personne is, by exception, placed after the past participle. Je n'ai pas CD le tempe. Je n'ai rien fait. Je n'ai jamais été .1 Paria. Je n'ai vu personne. lhave not had the time. I have (tone nothing. I have never been in Paris, /have seen no one. 8. When the words rien, jamais, personne, begin a sen- tence, they arc followed by the particle ne placed before the verb. Rien n'est plus facile. Jamais je ne funic. Personne n'est venu. Nothing is easier. I never smoke. Practical French Course OTHER NEGATIVE EXPRESSIONS. The manner of expressing the negatives but, only ; no more; but little, but few ; no, not any; neither, nor, is shown in the following examples : Je n'ai que cinq sous. Je n'ai plus d'argent. Je n'ai guère d'amis. Je n'ai aucun intérêt. Je n'ai ni le temps ni l'argent. / have only five cents. I have no more money. I have but few friends. I have no interest. I have neither the time nor the {money. OBSERVATION. After the verbs savoir, to know ; pouvoir, to be able ; oser, to dare, and cesser, to cease, the negative (pas) is suppressed for elegance. Je ne sais où aller. / do not know where to go. Je ne puisle faire. I cannot do it. Je n'ose le dire. / dare not say it. EXERCISE. Let the pupil replace each dash by the requisite word i. Voulez- vous? Will you? 2. Je veux. / will. 3. Pouvez- vous ? Can you ? 4. Je peux (or) je puis. I can. Vous parlez français Il parle français — — ? — ? 7. Votre mari — — ■ — ? 8. Ma sœur ici ? 9. malade? 10. — je — suis. 11. 12. /. — f Will you not ? 2. — . I will not. 3- — ? Can you not ? 4- — ■ I cannot. 5. You speak French, do you not ? 6. He speaks French, does he not? 7. Is your husband French ? 8. Is my sister here ? q. Are you ill ? 10. Yes, I am. 11. Are you not tired ? 12. Yes. I am. 66 Practical French Course ONZIEME LEÇON LESSON XL NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. There are two kinds of numeral adjectives, the cardinal and the ordinal. I.— Cardinal Numbers. I, Un 2, i tens 3. 'I'mis 4. Quatre 5. Cinq 6, ^i\ 7- Sept 8, Huit 9* Neuf i<>. Dix 1 1, ( taxe i • Treize M. Quatorze is, Quinze i6, 17. Dix-sept i8, Dix-huit I ux-neuf .>>>, Vingt ( ûng i. (dur). troo-ah). kahtr). Bftnk . I Witt . (nûf). (ôngz). (d . * k.ili ' •lût' . 21, Vingt et un (van-tay-ûng). 22, Vingt-deux (vânt-dûr). 23, Vingt-trois (v&nt-troo-ah). 24, Vingt-quatre (vànt-kahtr). j,s, Vingt-cinq (vant-sànk). j'>, Vingt-sis (vànt-sees). •7. Vingt Bept (vânt-set). 28, Vingt-huit (vânt-weet). 29, Vingt-neuf (v&nt-nûf). v. Trente (tront). luarante (kah-ront). 50, Cinquante (san-kônt ). 60, Soixante (swah-soht). 70, Soixante-dix 1 swah-sout-dees) 8 1 Quatre-vingtSi kahtr-vàng l. tre-vingt-dis 1 kahtr-vftn- [i ■ .. Cent Bahng 1. [dees) 200, Deux cents (dusahng). Mille (meal i.ooo.ou), Million (mee-lee-ông). IMPORTANT REMARKS ON THE CARDINAL NUMBERS. 1. The feminine of un (ont) is une, Practical French Course; 67 2. The x of deux, six and dix is sounded like z before a word commencing with a vowel or an h mute, but it is silent before a consonant. Deux enfants (dûzông-fong), two children. Six oranges (seezoh-rongzh), six oranges. Dix hommes (dee-zohm), ten men. Deux mois (dur mwah), two months. Six semaines ("see sermân), six weeks. Dix francs (dee frông), ten francs. 3. The x of six and dix is sounded like s when it is final. Nous sommes six (noo sohm sees), we are six. Nous étions dix (noo-zay-tee-ông dees), we were ten. 4. The f of neuf is pronounced like v before a vowel or an h mute. Neuf ans (nû-vông), nine years. Neuf hommes (nû-vohm), nine men. 5. Numbers are formed in succession, as in English, up to seventy, the first nine being placed between each tenth. The word et {and) is used only for 21, 31, 41, 51, 61, 71, 6. Between 60 and 80, and again between 80 and 100, we repeat in French the first nineteen numbers. Thus, we say : Soixante-dix (60 + 10) for 70. Soixante et-onze (60 + 11) for 71, and so on. Quatre-vingt-dix (80 + 10) for 90. Quatre-vingt-onze (80 + 11) for 91, and soon. 68 Practical French Course 7. In French we do not say un cent, but simply cent, hundred; nor do we use the conjunction et [and) between cent and another number. Thus, for instance, we do not say un cent et cinquante, but simply cent cinquante (150). Then again, we do not say dix cents for ten hundred, but mille (one) thousand ; nor do we say vingt et un cents for twenty-one hundred, but deux mille cent, tzvo thousand [and one) hundred, and so forth. However, we generally count by hundreds from eleven to nineteen. Thus, we say : Onze cents, eleven hundred, instead of mille cent. Douze cents, twelve hundred, " mille deux cents. Treize cents, thirteen hundred, " mille trois cents. 8. The word mil {thousand) is used instead of mille for the Christian era. L'an mil neuf cent, the year one thousand nine hundred. However, in conversation, we say more frequently: L'an dix-neuf cent, the year nineteen hundred. 9. Cardinal numbers do not vary except vingt and cent, which take an s when multiplied by one number and not followed by another. Quatre-vingt* hommes, eight? men. Deux-cents francs, two hundred '/runes. Trois-cent cinquante soldats, three hundred and fifty soldiers. 10. The English word " figure " is in French chiffre, (m.) The word "number" is in French nombre{m.). "Numéro" is used for houses, rooms, carriages and badges. " Even numbers " are called in French nombres fairs. " Odd numbers" are called in French nombres impairs. Practical French Course 69 II. — Ordinal Numbers. The ordinal numbers are generally formed in French by- adding the termination ième to the cardinal numbers. Deuxième, second. Troisième, third. Vingtième, twentieth. Deux, two. Trois, three. Vingt, twenty REMARKS. I. When the cardinal number ends with a mute e, that letter is omitted before the termination ième. Quatre, four. Onze, eleven. Trente, thirty. Quatrième, fourth. Onzième, eleventh. Trentième, thirtieth. 2. The f of neuf is changed into v before the termina- tion ième. Neuf, nine. Dix-neuf, nineteen. Vingt-neuf, twenty-nine. Neuvième, ninth. Dix-neuvième, nineteenth. Vingt-neuvième, twenty-ninth. 3. The q of cinq is followed by u before the termina- tion ième. Cinq, five. I Cinquième, fifth. Vingt-cinq, twenty-five. \ Vingt-cinquième, twenty-fifth. 4. First is rendered in French by premier (m.) première (f.). Last is rendered in French by dernier (m.) dernière (f.). Le premier jour, (m.) Le dernier jour. La première semaine, (f.) La dernière semaine. The first day. The last day. The first week. The last week. 70 Practical French Course 5. After the numbers 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 80, 100 and 1,000, the ordinal adjective first is rendered by unième. Vingt et unième. Trente et unième. Quarante et unième. Cent-unième. Twenty-first. Thirty-first. Forty-first. One hundred and first. 6. Second is rendered in French by second (ser-gohng ) when one speaks of only two persons, animals or objects, and by deuxième if there is a third, fourth, etc. Voua êtes le premier. Je buTs Le second. V"ib êtes le premier. t le deuxième. Henri est le troisième- You air the first, I am the second. You air the first. Louis is the second. //- m y ■;: //'(' third 7. The ordinal numbers (except premier) are replaced in French by the cardinal numbers: Aft. r tin.- names of sovereigns. Before the names of months. k>D premier. Napoléon tr< Louis quatorze. i.e premier janvier. 1.' quatre juillet. i,e quatorze juillet. Napoleon tin- First. Napoleon the Third. h< Fourteenth. The first [of) January. t 'July, u rt 'truth (of ) July. III.— Fractional Numbers. Demi. half, (adj.) I,. 1 moitié, thr half. Ut tiers, thé third. I.e quart, thr fourth. Le cinquième, the fifth. me, the sixth (etc. ). Une demie, a half. Une moitié, one-half. I"u tiers, our third. lu (]u;irt, our- fourth. Tu cinquième, one-fifth. lu sixième, om sixth [etc). Practical French Course 71 REMARK. The word demi [half) remains invariable when it pre- cedes the substantive, but takes the gender of the noun when it is placed after it. Une demi-heure. Une heure et demie. A half hour. One hour and a half. IV. — Nouns used as Numbers. Une paire, a pair. Une douzaine, a dozen. Une huitaine, eight days, Une quinzaine, a fortnight. Une vingtaine, about twenty. Une trentaine, about thirty. Une centaine, about one hundred. Une millier, about one thousand. EXERCISE. i. Où demeurez- vous ? Je demeure à — . 2. Quelle rue? (f.) Bleecker. 3. Quelle avenue ? (f.) — avenue. — Madison. 4. Quel étage? (m.) 1. Where do you live ? I live in ■ — . What street ? Forty-second street. Thirty-fourth street. FouHeenth street. 125th street. Twenty-first street. Bleecker street. j. What avenue ? First avenue. Second avenue. Fifth avenue. Madison avenue. 4. What floor. First floor. Seventh floor. Tenth floor. 72 Practical French Course 5. Quel âge avez- vous? J'ai vingt ans. Quel âge a votre fils ? lia — — . Quel âge a votre fille i Elle "a — — . Quefâge a-t-il? H a . Quel âge a-t-elle? Elle a — " . How old are you ? L it. : 11 'hat age have you ? I am twenty years old. Lit.: I have 20 years. How old is your son ? He is fifteen years old. How old is your daughter? She is nine years old. How old is he f He is seventy-five years old. How old is she ? She is twenty-four years old. 6. Quel est le quantième du mois? C'est le — . C'est le . C'est le . C'est le — . 6. What day of the month is it ? rt is the first. It is the nineteenth. It is the thirty-first. It is the last. 7- Combien de M res avec- J'en ai — . VOUS p 7- How many brothers ha: e you * I of them ) have one. (///.) Combien d»- Mean avet How many sisters have you ? J'en ai — . voua? 1 have one. (f. 1 8. Combien de Livre* avei How many books have you f J'en ai — — . 1 have about twenty. J'en ai . I have about forty. J'en ai — — . "■ /have about fifty. 9- - — . Louis the Fifteenth, I.ouis — . Louis the Sixteenth. Henri — . Henry the Fourth. Bdouard — . Edward the Seventh. Guillaume — . Le . to. William the Second. 0. The first of May % /cos. Practical French Course 73 DOUZIEME LEÇON. LESSON XII. I . — Demonstrative Adjectives. The demonstrative adjectives are, in French SINGULAR MASCULINE ce This or thaL FEMININE SINGULAR cette This or that. plural, either gender ces These or those. Ce monsieur. Cette dame. Cette demoiselle. Ces messieurs. Ces dames. Ces demoiselles. This or that gentleman. This or that lady. This or that young lady. These or those gentlemen. These or those ladies. These or those young ladies. REMARKS. I. Before a masculine word beginning with a vowel or an h mute, a euphonic t is added to ce (cet). Cet enfant. Cet oiseau. Cet arbre. Cet encrier. Cet établissement. Cetliomme. Cethôtel. This or that child. This or that bird. This or that tree. This or that inkstand. This or that establishment. This or that man. This or {hat hotel. 74 Practical French Course 2. Although the same word is used in French to ex- press this and that, these and those, the nearness or re- moteness of an object may be indicated by the adverb ci (abbreviation of ici, here) and là, meaning there, placed after the noun and joined to it by a hyphen. Ci refers to this and these ; là to that and those. Ce livre-ci (m.), this book. Ces livres-ci, these books. Cette plume-ci I f. ), this pen. Ces plumes-ci, these pens. Ce livre-là, that book. Ces livres-là, those books. Cette plume-là, that pen. Ces plumes-là, those pens. II. — Possessive Adjectives. The French possessive adjectives are : Singular masculine. Singular feminine. Plural, either gender, mv thy his, her, its mon ton son ma ta sa mes tes ses our your their notre votre leur nos vos leurs IMPORTANT REMARKS. i. In French the possessive adjectives ton, ta, tes (thy) are always used to denote intimacy, instead of votre (j'our). ( hi est 1. 1 in où --"lit tes parents : Where is thy father f Where is thy moth Where are thy parents .' Practical French Course 75 2. In French the possessive adjective must be repeated before each noun with which it has to agree in gender and number. Mon père, ma mère, mes sœurs et I My father, mother, sisters and mes frères sont à la campagne. | brothers are in the country. 3. Before a feminine word beginning with a vowel or an h mute, the masculine adjectives mon, ton, son, are substi- tuted, for the sake of euphony, for the feminine ma, ta, sa. Thus, we say : Mon amie, my friend (f.), instead of ma amie. Ton amie, thy friend, " ta amie. Son amie, his or her friend, " sa amie. Mon habitude, my habit, instead of ma habitude. TonTiabitude, thy habit, " ta habitude. Son habitude, his or her habit, " sa habitude. 4. In French the possessive adjective of the third per- son singular, son, sa, ses, does not agree with the possessor, as in English, but with the object possessed. In other words, the French possessive- adjective agrees in gender and number with the noun that follozvs it. Il a perdu son père. I He has lost his father. ifa perdu sa mère. He has lost his mother. Il a perdu ses parents. Bile a perdu son père. Elle a perdu sa mère. Bile a perdu ses parents. He has lost his parents. She has lost her father. She has lost her mother. She has lost her parents. OBSERVATION. He is, she is, they are, are rendered in French by il est, (m.) elle est (f.), ils sont (m.), elles sont (f.), when they re- 76 Practical French Course late to an adjective, and by c'est, it is, or that is ; ce sont, they are, these are or those are, before a substantive. However, in consequence of a recent decision (February 26th, içoi) of the Minister of Public Instruction, c'est may be used instead of ce sont. PRACTICE. Comment trouvez-vous ce vin? Il est très bon. m. | Comment trouvez-vous cette Klle est excellente, f.) [soupe? Comment trouvez- vous ces pois ? Ils sont délicieux . m. pi. ) Comment tr ou v ez- voua ces fraises? Biles sont exquises, t. pi.) Connaisses- vous cet homme là? Oui, c'est le concierge /*that house. Who is that gentleman He is my cousin. He it my friend. Who is that gentleman 9 Who is that man .' He is my father. He IS my unele. He is my grand-father. Who is that lady? She is my mother. Practical French Course 77 C'est ma tante. C'est ma grand'mère. Qui est cette demoiselle ? C'est ma sœur. C'est ma nièce. C'est mon amie. Qui sont ces messieurs ? Qui sont ces hommes ? Qui sont ces jeunes gens ? Ce sont (or c'est) mes amis. Qui sont ces dames ? Qui sont ces demoiselles ? Qui sont ces jeunes filles ? Ce sont (or c'est) mes amies. Comment va votre beau-père? Comment va votre beau -frère ? Comment va votre beau-fils ? Il va bien, merci. Comment va votre belle-mère ? Comment va votre belle sœur ? Comment va votre belle-fille ? Elle va bien, merci. Comment vont vos parents ? Ils vont bien, merci. Comment va ton père ? (familiar.) Il va bien, merci. Comment va ta mère ? Elle va bien, merci, Comment vont tes parents ? Ils vont bien, merci. She is my aunt. She is my grand-mother Who is that young lady ? She is my sister. She is my niece. She is my friend. Who are those gentlemen ? Who are those men ? Who are those young men (people} ? They are my friends. Who are those ladies ? Who are those young ladies ? Who are those young girls ? They are my friends. How is (goes) your father-in-law? How is your brother-in-law ? How is your son-in-law ? He is (goes) well, thank you. How is your mother-in-law f How is your sister-in-law ? How is your daughter-in-law? She is well, thank you. How are (go) your parents ? They are (go) well, thank you. How is thy father ? He is well, thank you. How is thy mother ? She is well, thank you. How are thy parents ? They are well, thank you. 78 Practical French Course Avez- vous vu notre cheval ? Avez-vous vu notre voiture ? Avez-vous vu nos rieurs? Qui avez-vous vu ? J'ai vu son frère, sa femme et ses enfants. J'ai vu son mari, sa sœur et ses enfants. J'ai vu leur pire, leur mère et leurs amis. C'est mon affaire, t C'est son affaire. C'est votre affaire. C'est notre affaire. Cest leur affaire C'est ma faute. Ce n'est pas ma faute. Hair you seen our horse ? Have you seen our carriage t Have you seen our flowers? Whom have you seen : I have seen his brother, children. ■i/e and I have seen her husband, sister and children. I have seen their father, mother and friends. That is my business. That is his or her business. That is your business. That is our business. That is their business. It is my fault. It is not my fault. EXERCISE FOR TRANSLATION. i. IImw ilo you like that cigai m. It is very goi "'■ t, i [owdo you like thai it is excellent '■. I ii> you know those young la. I;. Ves, the} are my brother's daughters. The] art my nieces. I in you kimw that young man? Yes, hi- is tin- doctor's son, IK- is m\ friend. I in you know tli.it young Inly '' Yes, sin- is my sister's daughter. She is my ni< Do you know those gentlemen ' Yes, the) sre my friends. Do J OU know that \ OUng man? Yes, he is tin- janitor's son. Who is that gentleman ' I [e is m v wifi's father. I U- is ins father-in-law. Win. is that la.lv ? Slu- is my husband's mother. She is my mother-in-law Practical French Course 79 TREIZIEME LEÇON, LESSON XIII. QUALIFYING ADJECTIVES. GENERAL RULE. The French adjective always agrees in gender and num- ber with the noun to which it refers. -How to form the Feminine of Adjectives. I. The. feminine of adjectives is generally formed by the addition of a mute e to the masculine. Un petit garçon. Une petite fille. Un grand théâtre. Une grande maison. Cet homme est très grand. Cette femme est très grande. A little boy. A little girl. A large theatre. A large house. That man is very tall. That woman is very tall. 2. Adjectives ending in the masculine with a mute e do not change in the feminine. Ce monsieur est très riche. Il est très charitable. Cette dame est très riche. Elle est très charitable. That gentleman is very rich. He is very charitable. That lady is very wealthy. She is very charitable. Practical French Course II. — How to form the Plural of Adjectives. I. The plural of adjectives is generally formed by add- ing s to the singular. Ces garçons sont très grands. Ils sont très polis. Ces filles sont très grandes. Elles sont très polies. Those boys are very tall. 'They are very polite. Those girls are very tall. They are very polite. 2. When the adjective relates to two or more nouns of different genders, it is put in the masculine gender. Ce garçon et cette fille sont très That boy and girl are vety tall. grands. Ils sont très polis. They are very polite. NI.— Place of Adjectives. i. The adjective in French has no definite place. It sometimes precedes the noun, but more frequently fol- lows it. Euphony is the best rule to go by. Vu bon garçon. Tu mauvais garçon. Une jolie fille. Vu infant pareaariiT. Un homme laborieux. l'n élève studieux. l'n homme charmant. A good boy. A bad boy, A pretty girl. A la: y child. An industrious wan. A studious pupil. A (banning watt. 2. Some adjectives have a different meaning, according as they are placed before or after the noun. Practical French Course 81 The following are those which occur more frequently: Un grand homme, a great man. Un petit homme, a short man. Un brave homme, an honest man. Une sage-femme, a mid-wife. Un homme grand, a tall man. Un homme petit, a mean fellow. Un homme brave, a brave man. Une femme sage, a virtuous woman IMPORTANT REMARKS ON THE FEMININE OF CERTAIN ADJECTIVES. I. Adjectives ending in f change that termination into ve for the feminine. Neuf (m.), neuve (f.), (brand)new. Actif (m.), active (f.), active. Vif (m.), vive (f.), lively. Attentif (m.), attentive (f.), attentive. 2. Adjectives ending in x change that termination into se. Heureux, heureuse, happy. Malheureux, malheureuse, unhappy. Courageux, courageuse, courageous Jaloux, jalouse, jealous. 3. Adjectives ending in eur generally change that ter- mination into euse. Flatteur, flatteuse, flattering. I Trompeur, trompeuse, deceiving. Menteur, menteuse, deceitful. I Moqueur, moqueuse, mocking. However, the adjectives extérieur, exterior ; intérieur, interior ; supérieur, superior ; inférieur, inferior; meilleur, better ; majeur, major ; mineur, minor, form their femin- ine according to the general rule, that is, by the simple addition of a mute e. 82 Practical French Course 4. Adjectives ending in eau change that termination into elle. Beau, belle, beautiful. \ Nouveau, nouvelle, new {different). 5. Adjectives ending in er change that termination into ère (air). Cher ("m . chère t), dear. Amer, amère, bitter. Fier (111 1, fière (f), proud. Léger (lay-zhay), légère, light. 6. Adjectives ending in as, os, ot, et, el, eil, il, en, on, double the last consonant before taking the feminine termination. Gras d Gros, grosse, big 1 ttout). Cruel, cruelle, cruel. Pareil, pareille, similar, aliht Gentil, gentille, nice. Ancien m), ancienne (f), ancient. 1;. m, bonne, good. S..t, sotte, foolish, silly. Coquet, coquette, coquettish. Net, m- tu-, neat. 7. Contrary to the above rule, the adjectives complet, complete; discret, discreet ; secret, secret ; inquiet, uneasy, do not double the final t, but take a grave accent on the e which pre< edes the t. Complet, complète. Secret, se crèt e. Inquiet, inquiète. ADJECTIVES WHICH FORM THEiR FEMININE QUITE IRREGULARLY. Blanc m. , blanche f. , white. franchi . Sir. dry. < ■ Pou, folle, Mmi, molle, I knu m. . douce f), sued. Roux, rousse, reddish. Pauz, fausse, false. Public, publique, publie. Long, longue, long. Pavori, favorite, favorite. Vieux vee-ur , vieille vee-ay-yor) old. Practical French Course 83 OBSERVATIONS. I. Before a masculine word beginning with a vowel or h mute, the adjectives beau, nouveau, fou, vieux, are changed, for the sake of euphony, into bel, nouvel, fol, vieil (vee-ay-ye). Un bel enfant. Le nouvel an. Un vieil avare. Un vieil homme. Un fol espoir. A handsome child. The new year. An old miser. An old man. A foolish hope. 2. The termination ish in English adjectives of color is rendered in French by âtre. Bleu, blue. Bleuâtre, bluish. Rouge, red. Rougeâtre, reddish. Gris, grey. Grisâtre, greyish. IMPORTANT REMARKS ON THE PI/URAL OE CERTAIN ADJECTIVES. I. Adjectives ending in x or s do not change in the masculine plural. Cet enfant est très paresseux. Ces enfants sont très paresseux. Ce vin est très mauvais. Ces cigares sont très mauvais. That child is very lazy. Those children are very lazy. That wine is very bad. Those cigars are very bad. 2. Adjectives ending in au take an x. Those ending in al change that termination into aux. Beau, beaux, beautiful. Nouveau, nouveaux, new. Egal, égaux, equal. Principal, principaux, principal. 84 Practical French Course EXCEPTIONS. The following adjectives do not change their termina- tion into aux, but take an s in the plural, according to the general rule : Amical, fatal, final, frugal, initial, Nasal, naval, glacial, sentimental. PRACTICE. J'en suis fâché(e) pour vous. Je suis fâchéi e contre voua Je suis très fatigii' Je suis très surpris(e). Je suis tris embarnu Je suis très occupé(e). Je suis très pressé e , Je suis prêt e , Je suis malade. Je suis fftché e de voua déranger. Je suis fftché e de vous avoir dérangé. [dre. Je suis fftché e de vous faire atten- Je mus fftché(e)de vous avoir fait attendre. I a»i very sorry for you. I am angry with you. F am very tired. ram very much surprised. I am very much embarrassed, /am very busy. lam in agréai hurry. I am ready. I am sick. I am sorry to disturb you. I am sorry to have disturbed you. 11 eat amoureux. He is in love. Il <-st jaloux. He is jealous. il eat marié. He is married. il -. I fe is very mue. ,-<-.. He is oozy. 37> S>: -. II, is innocent 11. Un — manteau. 12. Une — maison. 13. Elle a de — yeux, (m.) 14. Elle a de — cheveux, (m. pi.' 15. Vous êtes très — . 16. Vous êtes très — . 17. — monsieur. 18. — madame. 19. — mademoiselle. 20. Mon — ami. 21. Ma — amie. 22. Etes-vous — ? 23- ? 24. Votre sœur ? -\v malade ? 26. . Je suis poor — . contre moi ? 29. Je suis fâché . Etes voua — ? Qtes-voua — ? [lest Bile est . Elle est — . [lest — . [les! ■ innocent Present indicative of AVOIR, to hû ; ETRE, to be, I have, t te. 1 am, etc. J'ai Je suis 1 .1 sa lu es II a II est \<>i g avons Nous sommes \ DUS a\ Bfl \ MIS êtes Ils ont Ils sont Practical P'rench Course *>7 QUATORZIÈME LEÇON. LESSON XIV. I. — How to form the Comparative of Adjectives. i. The comparative of superiority is formed in French by placing plus {more) before the adjective and que {than) after it. Paris est plus beau que New York. La langue anglaise est plus facile que la langue française. Il fait plus chaud qu'hier. Paris is more beautiful than New York. The English language is easier than the French language. It is warmer than yesterday. 2. The comparative of inferiority is formed by placing moins {less) before the adjective and que {than) after it. Je suis moins habile que vous. Je suis moins grand que vous. Il fait moins chaud aujourd'hui qu'hier. / am less skilful than you. I am not as tall as you. It is not as warm to-day as it was yesterday. 3. The comparative of equality is formed by placing aussi {as) before the adjective and que {as) after it. Je suis aussi grand que vous. / am as tall as you. L'un est aussi bon que l'autre. One is as good as the other. Il f aif aussi chaud qu'hier. It is as warm as yesterday. In negative sentences the adverb as before an adjective may be rendered either by aussi or si. Je ne suis pas aussi gros que vous (or)\ f am ^ ^ ^ ^ Je ne suis pas si gros que vous. > S3 Practical French Course Il ne fait pas aussi chaud qu'hier (or) ) It is not so warm as Il ne fait pas si chaud qu'hier. J yesterday. IMPORTANT OBSERVATIONS. I. More than, for nouns, is rendered into French by plus de que de. Plus de beurre que de pain. Plus de vin que d'eau. Plus d'hommes que de femmes. More butter than bread. More wine than water. More men than women. 2. Less or fewer than, for nouns, is rendered by moins de que de. Moins de beurre que de pain. Less butter than bread. Moins de vin que d'eau. Less reine than water. Moins d'hommes que de femmes. , Fewer men than -women. 3. As much or as many as, for nouns, is rendered by autant de que de. Autant de Leurre que de pain Autant de vin que d'eau Autant d'hommes que de femmes. As much butteras bread. . Is much wine as wait >. As many men as women. 4. So much or so many, tant de. When the noun is omitted. J'ai tu 1 1 1 de travail ! J'ai tant de choses ft taire ! J'ai tant à faire ' Je n'ai pafl tant 'l'argent. Je n'ai pas tant île livres. before «1 noun, is rendered by is understood the preposition de / have so much work t / have so many things to dot I hare so much to do ! ! so much money. F haie not so many books. 5. Than, followed by a number, is rendered in French by de (not que). Practical French Course 89 Plus de vingt. Plus de cinquante. Plus d'une fois. Il est plus de trois heures. More than twenty. More than fifty. More than once. It is more than three o'clock. 6. A t the end of a sentence more is rendered by davan= tage, and by de plus after a number. En avez-vous assez ? Je n'en ai pas assez. Donnez-m'en davantage. Donnez-m'en un de plus. Have you enough (of it) ? I have not enough (of it). Give me more (of if). Give me one more (of them). II. — How to form the Superlative of Adjectives. I. The superlative absolute is formed in French by plac- ing the adverbs très, fort or bien (meaning very) before the adjective. C'est bien beau. C'est très bon. C'est fort intéressant. It is very beautiful. It is very good. It is very interesting. 2. The superlative relative is formed by placing before the adjective the words le plus, la plus, les plus, accord- ing to the gender and number of the noun. Le plus grand pays. (m. sing.) La plus grande ville, (f . sing. ) Les plus grands pays. (m. pi.) Les plus grandes villes, (f. pi.) The largest country. The largest city. The largest countries. The largest cities. REMARK. Adjectives in the superlative degree may be placed either before or after the noun : La plus grande ville, (or) La ville la plus grande, The largest city. 90 Practical French Course IRREGULARITIES. I. The comparative and superlative of the adjective bon, good, are irregular, to wit : Meilleur, better. Le meilleur, the best. Le vin français est meilleur que le vin américain. La bière allemande est meilleure que la bière française. Les cigares américains sont meil- leurs que les cigares français. Le meilleur vin. (m. sing.) La meilleure bière, (f. BUUJ. I Les meilleurs cigarea I m. pi. | Les meilleures oranges, (f, pi. Le meilleur du monde. French wine is better than Amer- ican wine. German beer is better than French beer. American cigars are better than French cigars. The best wine. The best beer. The best cigars. The best oranges. The best in the <<>/' the) world. 2 The comparative and superlative of the adverb bien, well, are ; Mieux, better. Le mieux, the best. Comment vous sente/- vous? Je me sens mieux. Comment va votre père ? Il va mieux. Il va beaucoup mieux. Tant mieux. C'est le mieux que je puis How do von feelt I feel better. vour father t fie u better. He is much better. So much the belter. It is the best that I can do. 3. The comparative and superlative of the adjective mauvais, had, arc : Plus mauvais <■<> | pire, worse. Le plus mauvais {or) le pire, the worst. Practical French Course 91 Vous êtes plus mauvais que moi (or)} y QU ^ ^^ ^ f Vous êtes pire que moi. ) C'est le plus mauvais cigare que j'aie jamais fumé. C'est le pire de tous les cigares. It is the worst cigar that I have ever smoked. It is the worst of all cigars. 4. The comparative and superlative of the adverb mal, badly, are : Plus mal (or) pis, worse. Le plus mal (or) le pis, the worst. Je parle mal français. Mon frère parle plus mal. Ma sœur parle le plus mal. Tant pis. C'est le pis qui puisse arriver. / speak French badly. My brother speaks worse. My sister speaks the worst. So much the worse. It is the worst that may happen. 5. The comparative and superlative of the adjective petit, small, little, are : Plus petit (or) moindre, smaller, less. Le plus petit (or) le moindre, the smallest, the least. 6. The comparative and superlative of the adverb peu, little, are : Moins, in a smaller degree, less. Le moins, the least. OBSERVATION. For a better understanding of the above rules, we will say that an adjective is a word which modifies a noun, while an adverb is a word which modifies a verb. 92 Practical French Course COMPARATIVE EXPRESSIONS. De plus en plus. De moins en moins. De mieux en mieux. De mal en pis. Aussitôt que possible. Le plus tôt possible. Au plus tôt. Au plus tard. Plus tôt que d'habitude. Ou plutôt. De bonne heure. De meilleure heure. Bon marché. Meilleur marché. Le meilleur marché. Moins on travaille, moins on veut travailler. Plus je vous vois, plus je vont aime. More and more. Less and less. Better and better. From bad to worse. As soon as possible. The earliest possible. At the earliest. At the latest. Earlier than usual. Or lather. Early. Earlier. Cheap {good market). Cheaper. The cheapest. The less one works, the less one wishes to work. The mote I see you, the more I like you. EXERCISE. I am older than you. You are taller than f. I am less rich than you. Is it ( older than yesterday f 1er than yesterday. Mon bread than butter. :t, r than u-iue. 8. Ai many boys OS ,e ir/s. 0, More than one thousand. i. The most beautiful eountry. 2. The most beautiful city, j. Frame and America are the ! beautiful eountnes in the world. Paris is the tnost beautiful eity in the world. •I i. Je suis — âgé — vous. 2. Vous êtes grand — moi. V Je Bttia riche — - vous. 4 Fait-il fn.id hier? 5. Il fait froid hier. f>. Plus — pain — — beurre. 7. Moins — eau vin. 8. Autant garçons — lilies. 9. Plus - vingt-cinq. 10. Plus mille. 11. — — beau pays. 12. belle ville. ; ;. La Prance et l'Amérique sont — pays monde. 1 }. l'a ri- est — — — ville — monde. Practical French Course 93 13. The America.fi ladies are the 15. Les Américaines sont — - most beautiful women in the belles femmes — monde. world. 16. The best book. 16. livre, (m.) 17. The best method. 17. méthode, (f.) 18. How is {goes) your mother ■? 18. Comment va ? 19. She is better, thank you. 19. Elle va . 20. How is your friend? 20. Comment ? 21. He is worse. 21. Il . 22. So much the worse. 22. Tant — . 23. Come early. 23. Venez . 24. I shall come early. 24. Je viendrai . 25. I shall come earlier. 25. Je viendrai . 26. Come as soon as possible. 26. Venez . 27. I shall come at six o'clock at 27. Je viendrai à r the latest. 28. I am getting {I become) more 28. Je deviens — — — — inté and more interested in the ressé(e) dans l'étude — - study of the French language. . 29. The more I study it, the more I 29. — je l'étudié, — je l'aime. like it. 30. How do you feel ? 30. Comment ? 31. I do not feel well. 31. Je ne me sens pas — . 32. How is your mother? 32. Comment va ? 33. She is better. 33. Elle . 34. She is much better. 34. Elle . 33. That is good. 35. C'est — . 36. It is very useful. 36. C'est — utile. 37. It is very amusing. 37. C'est — amusant. 38. Have you enough ? 38. En avez- vous — ? Imperfect Indicative of AVOIR, to have; ETRE, to be. I had, I was having, I used to have J'avais Tu avais Il avait Nous avions Vous aviez Us avaient I was, I used to be J'étais Tu étais Il était Nous étions Vous étiez Ils étaient 94 Practical French Course QUINZIEME LEÇON, LESSON XV. INDEFINITE ADJECTIVE. -Different Meanings of " Même.' I. The word même, preceded by the article le, la, les (the), is an adjective meaning same. 1. 1- même y>\n. m. 1. 1- même matin. i.t- même s"ir. I.t- même j > i i x . I.. i même nuit. F. | I. a m.' me semaine. ].:i même année, ]..i même chose. Ia-s mêmes hommes, m. pi. I j.irs. Toutes les heure* TOQtefl les deux heures. TOUS les jours. Tous les deux jours. Everybody (all the people). Every morning. Every evening. Every hour. two hours. Jay. other Jay. Tous (m.), toutes (f), are also used as pronouns, final s of tous is then sounded (toos). The Practical French Course; 97 Venez tous, (m.) Venez toutes, (f.) Prenez ces livres. Prenez-les tous. Prenez ces fleurs. Prenez-les toutes. Come ail. Come ail. Take these books. Take them all. Take these flowers. Take them all. Tout and toute are sometimes used as adverbs in the sense of quite, very, entirely. Il est tout jeune. Elle est toute jeune. Ce chapeau est tout neuf. Cette robe est toute neuve. C'est tout nouveau C'est une toute autre histoire. He is quite young. She is very young. That hat is brand new. This dress is brand new. That is quite new {novelty). That is quite a different story. Tout autre (m.), toute autre (f.), are used in the sense of any other. Tout autre aurait pleuré. Toute autre aurait ri. Any other would have cried. Any other would have laughed. Pas du tout. Du tout. Point du tout. Rien du tout. C'est tout. Voilà tout. En tout. Tout ensemble. Tout à vous. PRACTICAL EXPRESSIONS FORMKD WITH THE; WORD "Tout.' Not at all. Not at all (don't mention it). None at all. Nothing at all. That is all. That is all. In all. Altogether. All yours {yours very truly). 9S Practical French Course Tout-puissant. Tout d'un coup. Tout à coup. Surtout (or) par dessus tout. Tout de bon. Pas tout-à-fait. Tout-à-1'heure. Tous ies deux. C'est tout un. Tout au plus. Tout au moins. De tout mon cœur. Tout est bien qui finit bien. Almighty. All at once. All of a sudden. Above all. For good, in earnest (honest I) Not quite. H 'it h in one hour (just now). Ikd h of them. It is att the same. At the most. At the /east. With ail my heart. All is well that ends well. Ill— Other Indefinite Adjectives. Aucun (m. .aucune f. . N t (bef on a noun). Nul m. , aulle 1. 1 I The above two adjectives require the particle ne before the verb. Nul is a stronger negative than aucun. Aucun homme n'est parfait Nul homme n'est Immortel. .Xo man is perfect . No man is itnmortal. Tel m. i, telle (f. >, such. Tel n'est i>a> mon Intérêt Telle n'est pea ma pensée. Monsieur un tel. idiom Madame one telle. Such is not my interest. Such is not my thought. Mr. So-and-So, Mrs. S'-ti/nt-.So. Chaque, each, every. Chaque pays a ses coutumes. Every country has its customs. Chaque Lillet coûte cinq francs. I'.ach ticket costs five francs. Practical French Course Plusieurs, several. Pour plusieurs raisons. Pour plusieurs motifs. For several reasons. For several motives. 99 L'autre, the other. Les autres, the others. I/autre livre. Les autres livres. The other book. The other books. D'une manière quelconque. Donnez-moi un livre quelconque Quelconque, whatever, any. In anyway whatever {anyhow). Give me a book {any kind of a book). Quelque chose. Quelques livres. Quelque, quelques, some, a few. I Something. I A few books. OBSERVATION. When quelque chose is followed by an adjective, it requires the preposition de {of) before the adjective which retains the masculine form. The same rule applies to rien, nothing. Quelque chose de bon. Something {of) good. Rien de mauvais. | Nothing bad. EXERCISE FOR TRANSLATION. i. The same boy. 6. Is it the same? (m.) 2. The same girl. 7. It is the same. 3. The same children. 8. Is it the same? (f.) 4. The same book. 9. It is the same. 5. The same books. 10. Kven I. 100 Practical French Course ir. Even the professor. 41. Nothing extraordinary. 12. This very day. 42. Nothing good. 13- This very evening. 43- Both of them, (f.) U- All the time, (m.) 44- He is almighty. IS- All the year, (f.) 45- The almighty dollar. (nO 1 6. All the Americans. 46. How many in all? 17- All the Frenchmen. 47- Twelve in all. IS. All the Prend] women. 4*. The other day. 19- All the people. 49- Another time. Jn. Every 'lay. 50. Give me a few matches. 2 1 . Every month. 1 m. 51- Take these fruits. 22. Every «reek. 1. 52. Take them all. (m. ) -\v Th. \ 1:1. are all good. 53- Take these apples. 24- They ! f. 1 are all had. 54- Take them all. (f.) 2v I> that all? 55- She is goodness itself. 20. That is all. 56. The same exercise. | m. 1 27- What <1<> you wish ? 57. The same mistake (faute), (f.) Nothing at all. 58. Is it the same price? aç> 1 to j .mi understand ? 59- It is the same price. 3o. Not quite. 60. Every other week. }i. How many in all ? 61. This very evening. ja. Mi-- So-and 62. I [e i- quite small. 33- Bach tii 63- She is quite small. M Sometimes 64. Art you tired ? 35- • .1 times. 65 Not at all. J6 No man i- perfect 1 /••" ' 66. Not the least in the world. 17 Something fun 67. What do you wish ? Something < 68. Nothing at all. bing K'" "'• 69. All i- wrong. All goes badly Ï) 40 Nothing better. 70 All is right. All goes well '. Future Indicative of AV( )IR. to have; ÊTRE, to be. I -hall or will have, 1 I ■ hall or will he. etc. J'aurai Je serai Tu auras Tu seras Il aura Il sera Nous aurons Nous serons \ ous aurez Vomi serez Ils auront Ils seront Practical French Course 101 SEIZIEME LEÇON. LESSON XVI. I. — Personal Pronouns Used as Subject of the Verb. The personal pronouns used as subject of the verb are, in French : Je, /. Tu, thou. Il, he I u Elle, she) ' Nous, we. Vous, you. Ils, they, (in.) Elles, they. (f.) Personal pronouns are placed before the verb in affirm- ative sentences, and after the verb in interrogative sen- tences, with'a hyphen connecting them. Je suis, I am. Tu es, thou art, II est, he is \ Elle est, she is> (it is.) Nous sommes, we are. Vous êtes, you are. Ils sont, they (m.) are. Elles sont, they (f.) are. Suis-je? am I? Es-tu ? art thou i Est-il? is he? \ Est-elle ? is she ? ! (is it?) Sommes-nous ? are we ? Etes-vous ? are you ? Sont-ils ? are they ? Sont-elles ? are they ? IMPORTANT REMARKS. I. The pronoun they is rendered in French by on {one, someone, somebody) when it does not refer to anybody in particular. 102 Practical French Course On vient. On le dit. On vous appelle. On vous demande. On me l'a dit. They are coming. They say so. They call you {some one calls you). They -want you {you are wanted). They told me so. 2. The pronouns /, thou, he, they, are rendered by moi, toi, lui, eux (m.), elles (f), when they are preceded by c'est, it is, and also in comparative sentences. Qui a fait cela ? C'est mot C'est toi. C'est lui. Vous êtes plus riche que moi. Je suis plus jeune qu'elle. Je suis JihlS jelllle qu'fllX. (m.) Je suis plus jeune qu'elle Ji'ho has done that ? It is I It is thou. It is he. You are richer than I. I am younger than she. I am younger than they {arc). I am younger than they {are). 3. // is they is generally rendered by c'est eux (m.), c'est elles (f). when followed by que, whom, and by co sont eux (m.), ce sont elles (f.). when followed by qui, who. I. "est eux que je lilen lie. Ce s. mt eux qui me cherchent // M they whom I seek. It is they who seek me. 4. The same pronouns moi, toi, lui, eux, are employed instead of Je, tu, il, ils, when they are used absolutely or after .1 verb to give a greater force to the subject of the sentence. Practical French Cour.sk 103 "Vous et mol. Vous et lui. Vous et eux. Je le sais, moi. Il le sait, lui. You and 1. You and he. You and they. I know it, I do. He knows it, he does. II. — Personal Pronouns Used Objectively. accusative or direct object. Me (m' before a vowel), me. Nous, us. Te (f before a vowel), thee. Vous, you. Le I (V before a vowel), him \ it. La ) her ) Les, them. DATIVE OR INDIRECT OBJECT. He (m' before a vowel), to me. Nous, to us. Te (f before a vowel), to thee. Vous, to you. Lui, Lui, Leur, to him. to her. to them. III. — Place of Personal Pronouns. I. Both accusative and dative pronouns are placed before the verb in interrogative and affirmative sentences. Do you understand me ? He comprenez- vous ? (or) Est-ce que vous me comprenez ? Je vous comprends. 7" understand you. 2. In negative sentences the personal pronouns are also placed before the verb, but after the particle ne. Ne me comprenez- vous pas ? Je ne vous comprends pas. Do you not understand me ? I do not understand you. 104 Practical French Course 3. When the verb is in a compound tense the pronouns are placed before the auxiliary. At'avez-vous écrit? Je vous ai écrit. Have you written to me? I have written to you- PRACTICE. He connaissez- vous ? Ne me connaissez \ 1 ras pas ' Je VOUS connais. Je se vous connais Voyez-vous <.<• monsieur? ( >ui. je le vois. Le connaissez- voua ' Je le connais. Je ne le connais pas. 1 ette dame ? ( >ni. je la voia La connaissez-vous ' la innaia Je ne la connais paa , m messiem ( >ui, j< les I M itis } U s COnnaist Je ne les connais ]>.tv M'entendez-vous? Bat-ce-que vous m'entendez? Oui, je vous entends. rt'aimez-vous l Oui, je vous aime Aimez-vous ce monsieur . ( >ui, je l'aime. Do you know me .' ..- not know met I know you. I ,■ you know them .' I know them. I do not know them. Do you hear met Yet I heat you. Do you love met Do you like that gentleman ? Yes. I like kim. Practical French Course 105 Aimez- vous cette dame ? Aimez- vous cette demoiselle ? Oui, je l'aime. Aimez- vous ces messieurs? Oui, je les aime. Aimez- vous la langue française? Oui, je l'aime beaucoup. ft'avez-vous vu? Oui, je vous ai vu. Avez- vous vu votre ami ? Oui, je l'ai vu. Quand l'avez- vous vu? Je l'ai vu ce matin. Où l'avez-vous vu? Je l'ai vu dans le parc. Avez- vous vu votre amie ? Oui, je l'ai vue. (f.) Avez- vous vu vos amis ? Oui, je les ai vus. (pi.) JTavez-vous écrit? Je vous ai écrit. Lui avez- vous écrit ? Je lui ai écrit. Leur avez- vous écrit? Je leur ai écrit. Que lui avez- vous dit ? Que leur avez-vous dit ? Je lui ai dit .. Je leur ai dit Do you like thai lady ? Do you like that young lady ? Yes, I like her. Do you like those gentlemen ? Yes, I like them. Do you like the French language ? Yes, I like it very much. Did you see me ? (Me have you seen ?) Yes, I saw you. (I you ha ve seen. ) Did you see your friend ? Yes, I saw him. When did you see him ? I saw him this morning. Where did you see him ? I saw him in the park. Have you seen your friend? Yes, I have seen her. Have you seen your friends ? Yes, I have seen them. Have you written to me ? I have written to you. Have you written to him or her ? I have written to him or her. Have you written to them? I have written to them. What did you tell him or her? What did you tell them ? I told him or her I told them 106 Practical French Course Que vous a-t-il dit? Que vous a-t-elle dit? Que vous ont-ils dit? Que vous ont-elles dit? Il m'a dit Elle m'a dit Ils m'ont dit Elles m'ont dit Cela (or ça) m'est égal, (idiom.) Cela nous est égal. Cela lui est égal. Cela leur est égal. Qu'est-ce que ça me fait? Ça De me fait rien. Qu'est ce que ça nous fait ? Qu'est-ce que ça vous fait ? Qu'estrce que ça lui fait ? Qu'est-ce que ça leur fait? Cela ne me regarde pas, noua rde paa. \ ous regarde pas. Cela ne le regarde pas. Cela dc la regarde pas. Cela ne les regard) l'eu m'importe. What did he tell you ? What did she tell you f What did they (»i.) tell you ? What did they (/.) tell you ? He told vie She told me They {in.) told vie They {J'.) told me . // is all the same {equal) to me. It is all the same to us. It is all the same to him. It is all the same to them. What difference does it make to met i What do I care?) It mates no difference to me. What do roe care? What do yon caret What di'es he What do they care t That does not concern vie. That does not concern us. 'That does not concern you. That dots not concern him. 'That does not concern her. That does not i on, ci n them. It does not matter to me. IMPORTANT REMARKS. i. In the imperative used affirmatively the pronouns fol- low the verb, as in English. Me and to me arc then ren- dered by moi. Practical French Course 107 Croyez-moi. I Believe me. Parlez-moi. I Speak to me. 2. In the imperative used negatively the pronouns are placed before the verb, according to the general rule, but after the particle ne. Me and to me are then rendered by me. Ne me taquinez pas. I Do not tease me. Ne me parlez pas. I Do not speak to me. 3. When two pronouns, one direct and the other in- direct, occur with one verb, the personal pronouns te and vous are placed before the objective pronouns le, la, les, but the pronouns lui and leur are placed after them. Je te le donne. Je vous le prête. Je le lui donne, Je le leur prête, I give it {m.) to thee. I lend it to you. I give it to him. I lend it to them. 4. In the imperative used affirmatively the objective pro- noun is placed, as in English, before the personal pronoun. Donnez-le-moi. Donnez- le- nous. Donnez-la-lui. Donnez-les-leur. Give it (m.~) to me. Give it to us. Give it (/.) to him or her. Give them to them. {Lit.) EXCEPTION. In the imperative used negatively the personal pronouns me and nous precede the objective pronouns le, la, les (it, 1C8 Practical French Course Ne me le donnez pas. Ne nous le donnez pas. j Do not give if ( m. ) to me. Do not give it to us. OBSERVATION. After a preposition the pronouns him, her, them, are ren- dered by lui, elle, eux (m.), elles (f.). Avec lui. Sans elle. Pour eux. Contre elles. With him. Without her. Fort htm. (m.) i them. (/.) NOTE. This lesson he: the -v St important, it should /', made the object of -,er . rtudy. EXERCISE. /. He u younger than I. j. She is taller than he. j. I >,< you understand him .' I. I undt rstand him. understand ; 6. f understand her. y. II.; :i written to your 8. I have written to him. ■j. lie. / . // /: b ritten to me. II. I het you. i2. Speak to me in French, tj. Write (to i /. / shall write to him. hem. i. il est jeune . grande . i. US ;' imprends. s. comprene; ums.' comprends. 7. .\\. • voua écrit — ? 1 a-t-il > 1 i". II .1 écrit 1 1 Je parie, rlei en . 1 1 Je écrirai. is. Dites 16. Dites — . Practical French Course DIX-SEPTIÈME LEÇON. .LESSON XVII. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. I. The interrogative pronoun who (nominative) is ren- dered in French by : Qui (or) qui est=ce qui. Qui est venu ? (or) Qui est-ce qui est venu ? Qui a gagné ? (or) Qui est-ce qui a gagné ? Qui est votre professeur ? (or) Qui est-ce qui est votre professeur? Qui vous a enseigné ? (or) Qui est-ce qui vous a enseigné ? Qui vous a écrit ? (or) Qui est-ce qui vous a écrit ? Qui vous a donné cela? (or) Qui est-ce qui vous a donné cela ? Qui vous l'a dit ? (or) Qui est-ce qui vous l'a dit? Who has (is) come ? Who has won ? Who is your teacher ? Who has taught you ? Who has written to you ? Who gave you that ? Who told you so? 110 Practical French Course 2. The interrogative pronoun whom (accusative) is ren- dered in French by : Qui (or) qui est-ce que. Qui demandez-vous? (or) Qui est-ce que vous demandez ? Qui avez-vous vu ? Qui est-ce que vous avez vu ? Qui aimez- vous ? Qui est-ce que vous aimez? Whom do you ask for f Whom have you seen f Whom do you love? OBSERVATION. The interrogative forms qui est-ce qui and qui est-ce que are less elegant than qui, but theyare nevertheless frequently employed by French people in ordinary conversation. When, however ( who and whom are used absolutely. thc\" arc- always rendered by qui. 3. The interrogative pronoun what, used as an accusa- tive before iis ce que j'.ii fait ' Savez-vona ce que j'aime ' Savez-vona ce que j'aimeraia ce que voua voudrez. I litis ce que voua voudrez. Blangi ce que • tua voudrez. Buvez ce que \r.u-. voudrez, ma ce qui est bon ? vont ce qui m'ennuie ? m. lis ce qui : a' qui . •, ous 'U- voa affair u know what I think ? 1 know what I he!i, Do you know what I have done? Do you know what I liket know uhat I would like f l\> uhat you will. Sav what you will. Eat what you will. I h ink what you please. 1 know uhat Do you know uhat /.. happ, Attend to what , >:,, rm you Mind your own busin 2. What, employed absolutely or indefinitely, is ren- dered by quoi. Practical French Couksu 113 Quoi ! De quoi parlez- vous ? De quoi riez-vous ? De quoi est-il question? De quoi s'agit-il ? (idiom.) A quoi pensez- vous? A quoi bon ? (idiom.) A quoi bon pleurer ? La vie est trop courte ! Wnai! Of what do you sfieak ? What are you tang king at ? Whet ij the discussion about What is it about ? What are you thinking off What is the use f What is the use of crying ? Life is too short ! 3. What (or) which, relating to a noun, is translated by quel, quelle; quels, quelles, according - to the gender and number of the noun. Quel est votre nom ? Quel âge avez- vous ? Quel est votre métier ? Quel temps fait-il ? Quel est le jour du mois ? Quel est le train pour Paris ? Quelle est votre adresse ? Quelle est votre profession ? Quelle heure est-il ? Quelle est cette rue ? Quell e est cette avenue ? A quelle heure dînez- vous ? Quels romans lisez- vous ? Quelles sont vos intentions ? What is your name ? How old are yoti f What is your trade ? How is the weather ? What day of the month is it? Which is the train to Paris ? What is your address ? What is your profession ? What time is it ? What street is this ? What avenue is this ? At what time do you dine i What jiovels do you read? What are your intentions ? Which one is translated by : Lequel, in reference to a masculine noun, singular. Laquelle, in reference to a feminine noun, singular. Which ones is translated by : Lesquels, in reference to a masculine noun, plural. Lesquelles, in reference to a feminine noun, plural. 114 Practical French Course EXERCISE. /. Who has tola you that ? 2. Who has broken that -window ? j. Who has been elected t 4. What does he -want f j. What does site want f 6. What do they wantt m. j. // hat do they -want .' 8. What are you doing there f 9. What did he say f /<>. What did she s,n f 1. Qui vous a dit cela ? (or) Qui est-ce qui ? 2. Qui a cassé cette vitre? (or) ? 3. Qui a été élu ? (or) 4. Que veut-il ? {or) Qu'est-ce qu' ? 5. Que veut-elle ? (or) ? 6. Que veulent-ils? (c>;) 7. Que veulent-elles ? 8. Que faites- vous là? (or) ? 9, nii'.i til .lit ' (or) 1 t elle 'lit ? Conditional of AVOIR, to hou ETRE, to be. I should or would tu J'aurais Tu aurais Il aurait Nous aurions Vous auric/ Ils auraient should or would be, etc. Je serais Tu serais Il serait Nous serions Vous seriez Ils seraient Practical French Course 115 DIX-HUITIEME LEÇON, LESSON XVIII. . — Demonstrative Pronouns. SINGULAR. That, the one This That Masculine Celui Celui-ci Celui-là Feminine Celle Celle-ci Celle-là PI/CJRAI,. Those, the ones These Those Masculine Ceux Ceux-ci Ceux-là Feminine Celles Celles-ci Celles-là Quel livre avez- vous ? J'ai celui de mon frère. PRACTICE. Which book have y ouf I have my brother's (that of my brother). Quelle montre avez- vous ? J'ai celle de ma sœur. Quels gants avez- vous ? J'ai ceux de mon frère. Quelles bagues avez- vous ? J'ai celles de ma sœur. Mon chapeau est noir; celui de mon frère est gris. Which watch have you ? I have my sister's. Which gloves have you ? I have my brother's. Which rings have you? I have my sister's. My hat is black ; my brother's {that of my brother) is gray. 116 Practical French Course Ma robe est noire ; celle de ma sœur est grise. Mes gants sont noirs ; ceux de mou amie sont blancs. Vos cheveux (*) sont plus n< >irs que ceux de votre sœur. Vos robe- -.ont plus jolies que celles de votre sœur. Voyez ces leva livres : Lequel préférea-VOUS? Choiaù Je préfère celui-ci. (m. ring.) je préfère celui-là. My gown is black ; my sister's {that of my sister) is gray. My gloves are black ; my friend's (those of my friend) arc white. Your hair is blacker than your sis- ter s ythat of your sister). Your dresses are prettier than your 's (those of your sister). Sec these Which do you prefer t Choose. I préfet this. [préfet thai Voyez ! .Mes: Laquelle je préfère celle cl. f. ring.) te celle-là. i Lesquels eetn d. m. pU je préfère ceux-là. rdex ces fleurs: Lesquelles ; : re celles-ci. (f. pL) je préfère celles-là. See these two > Which do youprefèrf l prêter this. / prefer tbeX. Look at these £ Which J,' i ■■' firefert I préfet these. I préfet those. Look at these Which do you prefer t l préfet th< I I préfet tin (♦) The hair of persons is In Preach Us cht . i ux, the hairs (pi.) Xhe hair other than that of the head, and also the hair Of animals is called poUSn Practical French Course 117 II. — Demonstrative Pronouns Usea Absolutely. Ceci, this. Cela (or) ça, that. Ceci and cela are never used before a noun. They are indefinite or absolute pronouns serving only to point out objects. Voulez- vous ceci ? Prenez ceci. Donnez-moi cela (or) ça. Racontez-moi cela. Regardez cela. Voyez cela. Voyez-vous cela ? Ne dites pas cela. Ne faites pas cela. Ne touchez pas cela. Ne croyez pas cela. C'est cela (or) c'est ça. Cela va sans dire. Laissez ça tranquille. Do you want this ? Take this. Give me that. Tell me that. Look at that. See that. Do you see that? Do not say that. Do not do that. Do not touch that. Do not believe that. That is it. That goes without saying. Leave that alone. IMPORTANT REMARKS ON THE PRONOUN It. I. The pronoun it, relative to a noun, is translated by il or elle (he or she) according to the gender of the noun, as there is no neuter in French : Le dîner est-il prêt ? Oui, il est prêt. La table est-elle mise ? Oui, elle est mise. Is the dinner ready ? Yes, it (he) is (ready). Is the table set ? Yes, it (she) is (set). 118 Practical French Course 2. //, indefinite pronoun (not relative to a noun) is ren- dered in French by ce (c' before a vowel) as the nominative of the verb être, to be : Qui a déchiré ce papier? C'est moi. Ce n'est pas moi. Est-ce à moi que vous parlez ? Oui, c'est à vous que je parle. A qui est-ce à jouer i C'est à moi à jouer. C'est à vous à jouer. C'est à mon tour. Who tore (has torn) this paper? It is I. It is not I. Do you speak to met Yes, it is to you that I speak, U 'hose turn is it to play ? It is my turn to play. It is your turn to play. It is my turn. 3. The word ce is generally used by French people in the sense of that : Qu'est-ce que c'est } C'est l'ambulance. C'est le bruit îles voitures. Ce n'est rien. Qu'est-ce que c'était ? C'était une parade. Ce n'était rien. Qu'est ceci ? Qu'est cela ' Qu'est-ce que c'est ça ? Qu'est-ce que c'est que ça? (pop.) C'est une aiguille. C'est une épingle. C'est un dé. C'est du fil. C'est un bouton. What is it .' (If hat is that?) It is (that is) the ambulante. It is the noise ofcarriogts. It is 1 thai is) nothing. H hat u as it.* ■ : parade. It was nothing. What is this? U hat is thai t It is (or that is I a needle. It is a pin. It is a thimble. It is thread. It is a button. Practical French course 119 PRACTICAL EXPRESSIONS. C'est bon, // is good. C'est assez, It is enough. C'est mauvais, — bad. C'est trop, — too much. C'est facile, — easy. C'est trop petit, — too small. C'est difficile, — difficult. C'est trop grand, — too large. C'est joli, — pretty. C'est trop haut, — too high. C'est laid, — ugly. C'est trop bas, — too low. C'est gentil, — nice. C'est trop gros, — too big. C'est simple, — simple. C'est trop mince — too thin. C'est parfait, — perfect. C'est trop lourd, — too heavy. C'est correct, — correct. C'est trop léger, — too light. C'est absurde, — absurd. C'est trop court, — too short. C'est ridicule, — ridiculous. C'est trop long, — too long. C'est intéressant, — interesting C'est trop clair, — too light. C'est amusant, — amusing. C'est trop foncé, — too dark. C'est drôle, — funny. C'est trop loin, — too far. C'est doux, — sweet. C'est trop près, — too near. C'est amer, — bitter. C'est trop bête, — too foolish. C'est certain, — certain. C'est trop tôt, — too soon. C'est sûr, — sure. C'est trop tard, — too late. C'est douteux, — doubtful. C'est trop cher, — too dear. C'est possible, — possible. C'est trop froid, — too cold. C'est impossible, — impossible. C'est trop serré, — too tight. C'est terrible, — terrible. C'est trop sec, — too dry. C'est affreux, — dreadful. C'est trop mouillé, — too wet. C'est épouvantable, — frightful. C'est dangereux, — dangerous. C'est It is, that is C'est pratique, — practical. Ce n'est pas It is not C'est nécessaire, — necessary. C'était It was C'est bien fait, — well done. Ce sera It will be C'est mal fait, — badly done. Ce serait It would be Here Is. Here are. Here is or here are is rendered in French by voici, which is a contraction of vois ici, see here. 120 Practical French Course There is or there are is translated by voilà, which is a contraction of vois là, see there. Voici votre chapeau. Voici vos gants. Voilà votre parapluie. Voilà vos caoutchoucs. Here is your hat. Here arc yon: There is your umbrella. - vour rubbers. Here h, J Le voici. Hi re it is. ) Here sh La void. There he is, ) Le voilà. ( There it is.) There she is, 1 La voilà. Here they are, Les voici. There they are, Les voilà. ion chapeau ? ici. ■■.là. inné ? I..I \nici. La \>>ilà. I ii-i. Les voilà. Me voici. Nous voici. Where is my hat f Here it | it is. Where is m\ Here it ^ she) is. There it is. Where are tut Here they are. There they are. Here I am. EXERCISE. /. Whose hat is this f It M my broth, r\ th.it of |. umbrella Û // is »■■ i. A qui est ? m. • t 2. A <|ui est parapluii < Vst . Practical French Course 121 j. Whose gloves are these? They are my sister's. 4. Whose rings are these ? They are my sister's. 5. Take this {one). (/.) Take that (one), (m.) 6. Take these (ones), (m.) Take those (ones), (f.) 7. Here are two rings. Which do you prefer? 8. Here are two diamonds. Which do you prefer ? ç. Where is your book ? Here it is. 10. Where is my pencil ? Here it is. 11. Where are my gloves ? Here they are. There they are. 12. Where is my box of cigars ? Here it is. There it is. 13. Is it correct ? It is correct. It is not correct. 14. Here he is. 15. There she is. 16. There you are . 3. A qui sont — gants? (m. pi.) Ce sont -r- . 4. A qui sont — bagues? (f. pi.) Ce sont — ■ — . 5. Prenez . Prenez . 6. Prenez . Prenez . 7. — deux bagues, (f.) — préférez-vous? 3. — ■ deux diamants, (m.) — préférez- vous ? g. Ouest — livre? (m.) 10. Ouest — crayon? (m.) 11. Où sont — gants? 12. Ouest ? (f.) 13. Est-ce — ? (or) Est-ce que ? 14. — voici. 15. — voilà 16. — voilà! 122 Practical French Course DIX-NEUVIEME LEÇON. LESSON XIX. Relative or Conjunctive Pronouns. Qui, who, which (nominative). Que, whom, which, that (accusative). A qui, to whom, whose (dative). The relative pronoun que can never be suppressed in French like the corresponding English pronouns U'hojn, which. Likewise, the conjunction que {that), which is often omitted in English, must always be expressed in French. PRACTICE. L'homme qui demeure m premier étage est un vieux g arç on. I. r monsieur que j'ai salué est mou proft Mew de Français. j'.ii lu avec un très K r: ""l plsiair la charmante lettre que vous iu'.ivlv. écrite. Voici le livre que vous m'avez piété l.i semaine | Je l'ai trouvé très intéressant J<- vous re m e rci e beaucoup. The man who lives on the first floor is an old bachelor. The gentleman ('whom) I haz-e saluted is my French teacher. I have read with (a) very great pleasure the charming letter (which) you have written (to) me. Here is the book ( -which) you lent me last week, {found it very interesting. I thank you very much. Practical French Course 123 A qui avez-vous écrit ? J'ai écrit à mon ami. A qui est ceci i C'est à moi. A qui est ce parapluie ? Il est à moi. A qui est cette canne ? Elle est à mon frère. A qui sont ces gants ? Ils sont à ma sœur. A qui pensez- vous ? Je pense à mon ami. De qui parlez-vous ? Je parle du maire de New York. Pour qui est ceci ? Pour qui est cela ? C'est pour vous. Avec qui avez-vous été au parc ? Avec mon ami. Je pense que vous avez raison. Je pense que vous avez tort. To ivhom have you written ? I have written to my friend. Whose is this ? It is mine (belongs to me). Whose umbrella is this ? It is mine. Whose cane is this ? It is my brother's. Whose gloves are these? They are my sister's. Of (to) whom do you think ? I think of (to) my friend. Of whom do you speak ? I speak of the Mayor of New York. For whom is this ? For whom is that ? It is for you. With whom have you been to the park? With my friend. I think (that) you are right. I think you are wrong. OTHER CONJUNCTIVE PRONOUNS. The following are employed with reference to a noun or to avoid a double meaning in the sentence. Masculine. Feminine. Which or whom. Lequel. Laquelle. Of which, of whom. Duquel. De laquelle. To which, to whom. Auquel. A laquelle. 124 Practical French lourse plural. Masculine. Feminine. Which or whom. Lesquels. Lesquelles. Of u 'hi ch , of who m . Desquels. Desquelles. To which, to whom. Auxquels. Auxquelles. PRACTICE. A qui appartient l'hôtel dans To whom does the hotel in which lequel vous demeurez? you live bel A qui appartient la maison dans To whom does the house in which laquelle voua demeurez? you live bt Auquel de ces messieurs avez-vous La dame à laquelle j'ai ; banc /'<> which {one) of those gentlemen did you speak t to whom I ,v/>, >£,- ( / have spoke >i) is French. REMARK. The pronouns de qui, or from WÀom, and duquel, de laquelle, desquels, desquelles, of which, ox from which, are most frequently replaced l hers. Le sien. La sienne. Ours. Le nôtre. La nôtre. Yours. Le vôtre. La vôtre. Theirs. Le leur. La leur. Masculine. Feminine. Mine. Les miens Les miennes. Thine. Les tiens. Les tiennes. His or hers. Les siens. Les siennes. Les i ôtres. Yi'iti t. Les v ôtres. /'heirs. Les l< mra. Votre chapeau est la ici. PRACTICE, le mien est Your hat is there ; mine is here. Votre canne est là ; la mienne est ici. Practical French Course 127 Your cane is there ; mine is here. Vos gants sont sur la table ; les miens sont sur la chaise. Vos mains sont très petites ; les miennes sont grandes. Mon chapeau est noir ; le vôtre est gris. Ma robe est bleue ; la vôtre est rose. Your gloves are on the table ; mine are on the chair. Your hands are very small ; mine are large. My hat is black ; yours is gray. My dress is blue ; yours is pink. OBSERVATIONS. i. When used without the prefixed article, the above possessive pronouns become possessive adjectives. Ce chapeau est mien, Cette canne est mienne. Ces gants sont miens. Ces fleurs sont miennes. This hat is mine {belongs to me). That cane is mine. Those gloves are mine. Those flowers are mine. 2. There is in French no such construction as a friend of mine, of yours, etc. We say : Un de mes amis, (m.) Une de mes amies, (f.) Un de nos amis. One of my friends. One of our friends. EXERCISE. /. Do you know the gentleman who lives on the third floor? Yes, I know him. He is a doctor. He is a dentist. i. Connaissez- vous le monsieur demeure ? Oui, je — connais. docteur. dentiste. 123 Practical French Course He is a jeweler. He is a druggist. He is a dock/maker. He is a grocer. He is a butcher. He is a banker. 2. Do you know the lady who lives i'/i the fifth floor? Yes, I know her. She is a milliner. She is a dressmaker. She is a corset maker. She is a p i ! mist. She is a manicure. She is a claii voyant. j. Is tke gentleman French whom hath I metf No, he is German. ./. I\ the lady French to whom you have sf>(>i No, she is English. >ii have you (>. Whom have you metf u spoken t h i>i>: is tlr.s book ' whom are ti /<>. The man of whom I speak rich. it. The lady of whom I speak :; > y pretty. 12. Whose pencil is ' It is mine. / ,\ Whose \h il is / "line. if. Whose boohs air these f ate mine. bijoutier. pharmacien. horloger. épicier. boucher. — ■ — banquier. Connaissez-vous — Oui, je — connais. — — modiste. couturière. corsetière. palmiste. manicure. clairvoyante. v Le monsieur nous avons rencontré est-il ? Non, allemand. |. I.a dame \<>us ave« parlé est-elle — ? Non, . 5 avea \<>us vu ' t.. avez-vous rencontré ? 7. parlé ' 8. est liv n ' m. 1 v. -""Ht fleurs? 0. l.'hoiniiu 1 1..1 dame y parle est 12. — est crayon? m.) [1 est 13. est voilette ? | t '. > Bile est 01 c\ >t 14. — - sont li\ n b ' m | ut Practical French Course 129 ll Whose flowers are these ? They are mine. 16. He is a friend of mine. 17. She is a friend of mine. 18. Where is your book ? It is on the table. Where is yours ? It is on the chair. iç. Where is your sister ? She is uptown. Where is yours ? She is downtown. 20. Where are your brothers ? They are upstairs. Where are yours ? They are downstairs. 21. Where are your sisters ? They are in London. Where are yours ? They are in Paris. 22. To whom does this book belong? It belongs to me. To whom does this house belong? It belongs to Mr. Vanderbilt. 15. fleurs? (f.) Elles sont — (or) ce sont 16. C'est un - 17. C'est une Où est ? Il — sur Où est ? Il — sur 19. Où est ? en haut de la ville. Où est ? en bas de la ville. 20. Où sont ? Ils — en haut. Où sont : ? — sont en bas. 21. Où sont vos sœurs ? Elles sont . Où sont ? 22. appartient ? Il — appartient. 23. appartient cette — Elle . Present Subjunctive of AVOIR, to have; ÊTRE, to be. That I may have, etc. Que j'aie Que tu aies Qu'il ait Que nous ayons Que vous ayez Qu'ils aient That I ma}' be, etc. Que je sois Que tu sois Qu'il soit Que nous soyons Que vous soyez Qu'iïs soient 130 Practical French Course VINGTIEME LEÇON. LESSON XX. INVARIABLE PRONOUNS. En, some, any, of it, of them. This most important pronoun is employed in answers when the noun is understood to avoid repetition thereof. It immediately precedes the verb, except in the affirmative imperative, when it is placed after the verb. Encore, (some more. Ne plus, not any more. PRACTICE. Avez-vona du tabac ' J'en ai | /hah -n;iy ). Je n'en ai pas. Avtv-vnus encore de L'argent J'en ai encore. jt- n'en ai plua Have you any tobacco? have. I | n/' H) have not. U any more money ? I have some "■ I have not any MOI Déairezrvona e n core on peu de Do you wish some more chicken t poulet ? Merci ; j'en ai assez. Avea-voni des enfanta ' Oui, j'en ai Thank you ; I have enough. u any children :ave. Practicai, French Course 131 Combien en avez- vous ? J'en ai deux. Avez- vous du papier ? Avez- vous de la colle ? Avez- vous des enveloppes ? J'en ai. Je n'en ai pas. Je n'en ai point. Je n'en ai plus. Combien de frères avez- vous ? J'en ai un. Combien de sœurs avez-vous ? J'en ai une. (f.) Combien d'enfants avez-vous? J'en ai plusieurs. Combien en avez-vous? J'en ai cinq. Avez-vous beaucoup d'élèves? J'en ai beaucoup. En avez-vous assez ? J'en ai assez. Je n'en ai pas assez. J'en ai très peu. J'en ai trop. J'en ai de reste. En voulez- vous ? J'en veux. Je n'en veux pas. En voulez- vous encore ? Je n'en veux plus. J'en ai assez. En désirez- vous ? Combien en désirez- vous ? How many (of them) have you ? I have two. Have you any paper? Have you any glue ? Have you any envelopes ? I have some. I have not any. I have none. I have no more. How many brothers have you ? I have one. How many sisters have you ? I have one. How many children have you ? I have several. How many have you ? I have five. Have you many pupils? I have many. Have you enough ? I have enough. I have not enough. I have very little (or) few. I have too much (or) too many. I have some left. Do you want some ? I want some. I do not want any. Will you have some more? I do not want any more. I have enough. Do you wish for some (of it) ? How much (or) how many do you want ? 132 Practical Trench Course Donnez-m'en un peu. Donnez-m'en un morceau. Donnez-m'en une tranche Donnez-m'en un verre. Donnez-m'en une tasse. Donnez-m'en une livre. Donnez-m'en une douzaine. Donnez-lui-en un peu. Donnez-leur-en un peu. Donnez-nous-en un peu. Ne lui en donnez pas. Ne leur en donnez pas. Ne m'en donnez plus. Ne lui en donnes i>lus. Ne lui en donnez plus. Ne leur en donnez ]>lus. J'en ai a Il en a Bile en ■ assez. Nous en a\ ■ ■ • Voua en avez assez. Qs en ont ■ • Biles en ont assez. Give me (of if) a little. Give me a piece. Give me a slice. Give me a glass. Give me a cup. Give me a pound. Give me a dozen (of them). Give him or her (of il) a little. Give, them a little. Give us a little. Do not give him or herany. Po not give them any. Do not give me any more. /)o not give him any more. Po not give her any more. Do not give them any more. / have enough (of U or of them). He has enough. She has enough. We have enough. You have enough. They have enough, (m.) They have enough. [/.) OBSERVATION. The word en is also used as an adverb in the sense of from t>i ere. u de Paxil } J 'en aula OUS de l'aris ? J 'en \ Lena. from Paris f : then I am. Practical Frknch Course Y. 133 This is another important word in French. Used as a pronoun, it means to it, to them ; at it, at them. Used as an adverb, it means there. It is placed before the verb, except in the affirmative imperative. Pensez-y (pong-say-zee). J'y pense. J'y penserai. Y avez- vous pensé ? J'y ai pensé. Je n'y ai pas pensé. N'y pensez pas. N'y pensez plus. N'y pensons plus. Votre père est-il chez lui (or) à la maison ? Il y est. Il n'y est pas. Votre mère est-elle chez elle (or) à la maison? Elle y est. Elle n'y est pas. Vos parents sont-ils chez eux (or) à la maison ? Ils y sont. Ils n'y sont pas. Vos sœurs sont-elles chez elles (or) à la maison ? Elles y sont. Elles n'y sont pas. Allez-y! J'y vais! Allons-y ! Think of it. Lit.: Think to it. I think of it. I will think of it. Have you thought of it ? I have thought of it. I have not thought of it. Do not think of it. Do not think of it any more. Let us not think of it any more. Is your father at home (or) in the house ? He (there) is. He is not. Is your mother at home (or) in the house ? She is. She is not. Are your parents at home (or) in the house ? They are. They are not. Are your sisters at home (or) in the house ? They are. They are not. Go there ! I go there ! Let us go there ! 134 Practical French Course IDIOMATIC EXPRESSIONS FORMED WITH THE WORD Y. Il y a, there is (or) there are. Il y avait, there was (or) there were. Il y aura, there will be. Y a-t-ll? (<;; > > Est-ce qu'il y a?) Is there (or) are there ? Y avalt-ll ? (or) > Est-ce qu'il y avait PJ // 'as there (or) were there ? Y aura-t-ll? (or) ...... ., . - . ... „. \ H ll/ fhere de ? Est-ce qu'il y aura? > Il y a beaucoup de monde Il y avait beaucoup de monde Il y aura beaucoup de monde There are many people There were many people ... There will be many people Il y a, ago. Lit.: There is (or) there one. Combien de temps y a-t-il ? Il y a deux ans. il y a environ trois ans. Il y a longtemps. il y a bien longtemps. U n'y a pas longtemps. How long ago t years ago. .■I bon l three years ago. Long <'go. It is a very long time since. Not long ago. Practical French Course 135 EXERCISE. /. Is your brother married ? 2. Has he any children ? 3. How many has he f 4. He has two. 3. How many pupils have you? 6. I have twenty. 7. Has he many pupils ? 8. He has not many. ç. He has very few. 10. Have you much work ? 11. I have too much. 12. Have you any matches ? 13. I have not any. 14. I have one. 1 3. / have only one. 16. Do you wish any oranges ? 77. Yes, give me a dozen. 18. Do you wish any beer ? iç. Yes, give me a glass. 20. Are there many people ? 21. There are not many. 22. Were there many people ? 23. There were not many. 24. Is he from Paris ? 23. Yes, he is from there. 26. Will you think of it ? 27. Yes, I will think of it. 28. Will you be at home f 29. Yes, I shall be there. 30. Do not go there. r. Votre frère marié ? 2. A-t-il ? 3. Combien — a-t-il? 4. Il — a — . 5. Combien 6. J' 7. A-t-il — 8. Il n'— a g. II — a - avez- vous ? beaucoup. 10. Avez-vous — ouvrage ? 11. J' trop. — travail (pr) 12. Avez-vous 13. Je n' — ai point. 14. J'— ai — . 15. Je n' — ai qu' — 16. Désirez-vous ? 17. Oui, donnez m' 18. Désirez- vous ? 19. Oui, donnez m' beaucoup ? a . 22. — — beaucoup ? 23. Il n'y — avait . 20. 21. Il n'y 24. Est-il - 25. Oui, il _ ? est. 26. — penserez- vous ? 27. Oui, j' — penserai. 28. Serez- vous — vous ? 29. Oui, j' — serai. 30. N' — allez pas. 136 Practical French Course VINGT ET UNIEME LEÇON, LESSON XXL INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. ON. The pronoun on is used very often in the French language. It stands for the English words one, somebody, people, we, they, whenever these words have a general and indefin- ite meaning ; that is, whenever they do not refer to any- body in particular. The pronoun on enables the French to use the verb in the active form, which they always prefer to the passive. On SOIUH-. ( >n a Bonne. On frappe. ippe a 1.1 porte. ( )n .1 I: On 'lit qu'il est très riche. On ledit On me L'a «lu. < >n craint que ( m croit Ici on parle françait Ici l'on parle français euphonic l 1 Sonu body rings. S mtebody kas rung. :'\ knocks Somebody raps at the door. Somebody has knocked. . ///,;/ //<•• is very rich. <>ie it says.) 'd so. ■'hat) // is believed ; is sf>t *ken here. I is spoken here. Quelqu'un, mj body. Personne, nobody, tio on,-, not anybody. Practical French Course 137 Avez- vous vu quelqu'un? Je n'ai vu personne. Y a-t-il quelqu'un? Il n'y a personne. Y avait-il quelqu'un ? Il n'y avait personne. Have you seen anybody ? I have not seen anybody. Is there anybody there ? There is nobody there. Was there anybody there ? There was nobody there. Quelque chose, something, anything. Rlen, nothing, not anything. Avez- vous acheté quelque chose ? J'ai acheté quelque chose. Je n'ai rien acheté. Quelque chose' de beau. Quelque chose de drôle. Quelque chose de nouveau. Quelque chose d'intéressant. Donnez-moi quelque chose à boire. Rien du tout. Rien de bon. Rien de meilleur. Que faites- vous ? Je ne fais rien. Que dites-vous j Je ne dis rien. Qu'avez- vous dit? Je n'ai rien dit. Have you bought anything? I have bought something. I have not bought anything. Something fine. Something funny. Something new. Something interesting. Give me something to drink. Nothing at all. Nothing good. Nothing better. What are you doing ? I am doing nothing. What do you say ? I do not say anything. What have you said? I said nothing. Quelques-uns (m.)) ~ f Ouelnues-nnes ft.\ f ^ome, a Jew. Quelques-unes (f.) 138 Practical French Course Voulez-vous des timbres-poste ? Oui, donnez-m'en quelques-uns. Voulez- vous des enveloppes ? Oui, donnez-m'en quelques-unes. Do you want some postage stamps? Yes, give me a few. Do you want any envelopes ? Yes, give me a few. Chacun (m.)> c , Chacune (f.)j Each one. Chacun de ces messieurs. Chacune de ces dames. Chacun son goût. Chacun son métier. Chacun son tour. Chacun pour soi. Each one of those gentlemen. Each otic of those ladies. Each one to his taste. Each one to his trade. Each in his turn. Each one for himself. Tout le monde, everybody. Tout le monde sait cela. Tout k- monde le Mit. Tout le monde le -lit. Tout le monde aime l'argent. Everybody knows that. Everybody know* it. Everybody says so. Everybody likes money. Quiconque, whoever, whosoever. Quiconque n'aime pas n'est pu digne d'être aimé. Quiconque Batte Nés maîtres, les trahit. ' loves not his mother is unworthy of being loved. > flatters, his masters he- ihem. L'un (m. , l'une ! L'autre, the other. Les uns, les unes, {thé) ones. Les autres, the others. Practical French Course 139 L'un est blanc, l'autre est noir. I/' une est blanche, l'autre est noire. Les uns sont bons, les autres sont mauvais. Les uns disent oui, les autres disent non. Donnez-moi l'autre. Donnez-moi les autres. L'un est aussi bon que l'autre (or) L'un vaut l'autre. L'un après l'autre. Les uns après les autres. L'un ou l'autre, (m.) L'une ou l'autre, (f.) L'un et l'autre (or) Tous les deux, (m.) L'une et l'autre (or) Toutes les deux, (f.) Ni l'un ni l'autre, (m.) Ni l'une ni l'autre, (f.) Il faut s'aimer les uns les autres, (idiom.") One is white, the other is black. Some are good, the others are bad. Some say yes, the others say no. Give me the other. Give me the others. One is as good as the other. One after another. The ones after the others. Either one ; the one or the other. Either, both. Either, both. Neither. We must love one another. Autrui, others (invariable — applies to people only). Il faut respecter le bien d' autrui. Ne faites pas à autrui ce que vous ne voudriez pas qu'on vous fît. We must respect other 1 s property. Do not unto others that whfch you would not to be done unto you. 1-10 Practical French Course Qui que, whoever, whosoever. Quoi que, -whatever (before a verb in the subjunctive mood). Quel que, whatever (relating to a masculine noun). Quelle que, whatever (relating to a feminine noun). Qui que ce soit. Quoi que ce soit. Quel que soit le prix. Quelle que soit la difficulté. Whoever it may be. Whatever it mar ne. Whatever the price may be. Whatever the difficulty may be. i. One can. 2. One cannot. ,\ One could. /. They would 5. It is thought that 6 Has he seen any has seen nobody. you wish for anything f r anything. ing to cat. ; 1. Witt you have a . Yes, give me a few. un.) tj. Will you have a /./. Yt 15. What d: t 16, He did not \ anything. !-. U 'hat d tb\ She did not I \y anything. /•j. Evet 1 body likes him. dy likes them. .v. < hi, 'lier is pink. is bine, the other is yellow. I. — peut. 2. peut — . 3- — pourrait. 4. — voudrait 5. — pense que ft. A-t-il vu — ? 7- Il n' . B. I késirez-vons ? 9- Je — désire — . i". Donnes-moi à manger. 1 1. Voulez one ? I -V oui, donnes m'en . w. ] 1 MM7.-VOUS ? 1 1. ( >ui, donna m'en . IS. Qu'a-t-il — ? [& Il n' . <7- t-elle — ? |8. BUen'— — . 19. Tout lt- monde Y 20. Tout K- inonde 1' est rouge, Y est rose. ilen, Y — est jaune. Practical French Course VINGT-DEUXIEME LEÇON. LESSON XXII. THE ADVERB. -Formation of the Adverbs. Adverbs, in French, are generally formed by adding ment to the feminine termination of the adjective. Ment corresponds to the English ending ly : Trente, (f.) slow. Forte, (f.) strong. Grande, (f.) great. Heureuse, (f.) happy. lentement, Fortement, Grandement, Heureusement, slowly, strongly, greatly, happily. Adjectives ending in ant, ent, form their adverbs in amment, emment. Constant, constamment, constantly. Négligent, négligemment, negligently. Prudent, prudemment, prudently. Some adverbs require an acute accent over the e pre- ceding the termination ment : Profondément, deeply, Communément , commonly. Précisément, precisely. Commodément, commodiously : Expressément, expressly. Enormément, enormously. 142 Practical French Course II. — Place of the Adverbs. In simple tenses the adverb is placed after the verb, but in compound tenses it is generally placed between the aux- iliary and the past participle : Je travaille beaucoup. J'ai beaucoup travaillé. Vous faites très bien. Vous avez très bien fait. Je m'amuse beaucoup. Je me suis beaucoup amusé. / work very much. I have worked very much. }'ou are doing very well. You have done very well. I enjoy myself very much. I have enjoyed myself very much. III. — List of Adverbial Expressions. I 1. AHVKRHS OS MANNKK. Bien, Mal, Well, right. badly, wrong. Premièrement, firstly. Finalement, finally. Mieux, Ainsi, better. v.». thus. 1DVBRBS OF ORDER. Bnaemble, Séparément, together, separately. Peu, little, / W. Beaucoup, muck, many. Pint, more. .Moms, less, fewer. AUVKHHS Of (JIANTITV. hOUtZ, i nn ugh. Trop, too much, too tnany. Tant, SO much, so many. Autant, as much, as many. 4 ANYI.khs 0» AFFIRMATION. Vraiment, tmly, indeed. ' Assurément, assuredly. Certainement, certainly. Naturellement, naturally, urse. Practical French Course; 143 (5-) Où? D'où ? from where ? whence ? Quand ? when ? ADVERBS OP INTERROGATION. Comment ? how ? Combien ? how much ? how many? Pourquoi ? why ? (6.) ADVERBS OF PI, ACE. Ici, here Dedans, inside. U, there. Dehors, outside. Devant, before, in front of. Loin, far. Derrière, behind. Près, near. Dessus, upor Ailleurs, elsewhere. Dessous, unde meat h . Partout, everywhere. (7.) ADVEï .BS OF TIME. Aujourd'hui, to-day. Autrefois, formerly. Hier, yesterday. Désormais, henceforth. Demain, to-morrow. Dorénavant, hereafter. Maintenant, now. Aussitôt, as soon, immediately. Tôt, soon. Tard, late. Bientôt, very soon. Souvent, often. Alors, then. Jamais, never, or ever. Soudain, suddenly. Toujours, always. Ensuite, after, afterwards. Rarement, seldom, rarely. Enfin, lastly, at last. Longtemps, a long time. (8.) ADVERBIAL PHRASES. D'abord, first, at first. Tout d' abord, from the very first. Quelque part, somewhere. Nulle part, nowhere \ Peu à peu, little by little. Petit à petit, by degrees. Peut-être, perhaps. Tout d'un coup, all at once. Tout à coup, all of a sudden. Tout à fait, quite. Tout de suite, at once. Tout à l'heure, just now,by-and-by. A présent, at present. En avance, early, in advance. En retard, late, behind time. En haut, up, upstairs. En bas, down, down-stairs. D'ailleurs, besides, in other respects. Du reste, besides, ' ' En outre, besides that, further. De plus, moreover, furthermore. Par conséquent, consequently. De nouveau, anew, anon, again. En même temps, at the same time. 144 Practical French Course De bonne heure, early. A la bonne heure, very well. Combien de fois ? how many times? Une fois, once. Plusieurs fois, several times. Combien de temps ? ho:c long? Depuis quand ? since when t De temps en temps, once in a while. Loin de là, far from it. Tant s'en faut, far from it, (id.). A peine, hardly, sea/rely. Tant pis, so much the worse. Ça se peut, it may be. Ça se pourrait, it might be. REMARKS ON THE ADVERBS OF QUANTITY. I. Before a noun the adverbs of quantity, as already- stated, are always followed by the preposition de (of) : Combien de frères avez-vous ? Combien d'argent avez-vous ? Beaucoup de livres. Beaucoup d'argent. Trop de travail. Trop de peine. Trop d'argent Trop de inonde, l'eu d'argent Peu de personnes. Tant d'argent. Tant de fois. Plus d'ar^'iiit. Moins de travail. How many brothers have you? How much money have you ? Many books. Much money. Too much -work. Too much trouble. Too much money. Too many people. Little money. Few persons. S<> much money. .Si» many times. More money. Less work. 2. The adverb assez, enough, is always placed, French, before the noun, adjective, or adverb. l'argent. grand. h.iiit. l'»in. Aaaea bien. Enough money. Large enough. High enough. Far enough. Welt enough. Practical French Course 145 Je désire parler français couramment et correctement PRACTICE. / desire to speak French fluently and correctly. Je désire apprendre à fond la langue française. Est-ce que je parle trop vite ? Oui, vous parlez trop vite. Parlez plus lentement. Parlez plus haut. Parlez plus bas. Est-ce que je prononce bien. Vous prononcez très bien. Me comprenez-vous ? Je vous comprends parfaitement. Vous prononcez très distinctement. Aimez-vous la langue française ? Je l'aime beaucoup. Aimez- vous la musique ? Je l'aime passionnément. Aimez- vous l'argent ? Naturellement. Cela va sans dire. Cet homme est énormément riche. Cette femme est immensément riche. Il fait terriblement chaud. Il fait excessivement froid Allez- vous souvent au bal ? J'y vais très rarement. Allez-vous souvent au théâtre ? J'y vais une fois par semaine. Comment va votre ami ? Il est très malade. Tant pis ! / desire to learn the French language thoroughly. Do I speak too fast ? Yes, you speak too fast Speak slower. Speak louder. Speak lower. Do I pronounce well ? You pronounce very well. Do you understand me ? I understand you perfectly. You pronounce very distinctly. Do you like the French language ? I like it very much. Do you like music f I like it passionately . Do you like money ? Of course. That goes without saying. That man is enormously -rich. That woman is immensely rich. It is terribly hot. It is exceedingly cold. Do you go to the ball often ? I go {there) very seldom. Do you go to the theatre often ? I go once a week. How is your friend ? He is very sick. So much the worse ! 146 Practical French Course Comment va votre mère ? Elle va beaucoup mieux. Tant mieux ! How is your mother? She is very much better. So much the better ! EXERCISE. I. You work too much. 1. Vous travaillez — . 2. Yes, I work too much. 2. Oui, je travaille — . 3- He is doing very well. 3- Il fait . 4- He has done very well. 4- Il a — — fait. 5- She speaks very well. 5- Elle parle . 6. She has spoken very "well. 6. Elle a — — parlé. 7 He pronounces very badly. 7- Il prononce . 8, She pronounces very distinctly. 8. Elle prononce 9- You spc.ik better. 9- Vous parlez — . to. She speaks vety much better. 10. Elle parle . 1 1 . Let us go together. 11. Allons — . 12. 1 separately. 12. Allons — . 13- Where have you been f 13- — ave/.-vous été ? If- When unit you leave t 14. — partirez-vous? r S- I shall leave lo-moi •5- Je partirai — . r6. How d>> you pronounce this 16. — prononcez- vous word f | ni. '7- . ïpell that WOrdt .7- — épelez-vous 18. Why d 18. l>l ? JO. H milef 20. — sourit/ vous? 21. Where do you live? 21. demenrez-votu } 99. )'ou live too far OWOy. 22. \'<>us demenrei -','. : :< it h me f 23- ras fâché — '/■ >n it. 24. - *5> With miii 1 25- Avec plaisir. 96. Many / 26. monde. -'7- M re than that. i: cela. than that. cela. 9Ç. That : . 30. That ; 3°- facile. 3'- It is too difficult. 3i- — — difficile. mot? Ù4&&?? Practical French Course 147 VINGT-TROISIEME LEÇON. LESSON XXIII. I. — The Preposition. (i.) SIMPLE PREPOSITIONS A, at or to. Hors de, out of Après, after. Malgré, in spite of. Avant, before. Moyennant by means of. Avec, with. Nonobstant , notwithstanding. Chez, at or to the house of. Outre, besides, beyond. Contre, against. Parmi, amongst. Dans, in, into, within. Pendant, pending, during. De, of or from. Pour, for. Depuis, since. Sans, without. Durant, during. Sauf, save, except. Excepté, except. Selon, according to. En, in. Suivant, following. Entre, between. Sur, on, upon. Environ, about. Sous, under. [time) Hormis, except. Vers, towards (direction or Hors, except. Envers, towards (of people). (2.) COMPOUND PREPOSITIONS. A cause de, on account of. En faveur de, in favor of. A l'égard de, in regard to. Vis à vis de , opposite. Au delà de, beyond. En face de, facing. A l'exception de, with the excep- Près de, near, close to. Au dessus de, above. [tion of. Loin de, far from. Au dessous de, below. A côté de, at the side of. Au milieu de, in the middle of. Au devant de, before, in front. Au lieu de, instead of. Jusqu'à, until, as far as. Autour de, around. Quant à, as for. 148 Practicai, French Course II. — The Conjunction. (I.) SIMPLE CONJUNCTIONS. Car, for, because. Cependant, however. Comme, as, like. Donc, then, therefore. Et, and. Lorsque, when. Mais, but. Ni ni ... ., neither nor Néanmoins, nevertheless. Or, noie then, well no: Ou, or. Pourtant, however, though, Puisque, since. Que, that. Quoique, although. Si, sinon, if, if not. S. ut, ■whether, so be it. Toutefois however, vet, still. (2.) COMPOIND CONJUNCTIONS : followed by a verb). Aussitôt que v as. Pourvu que, Prot i Jed that. Dès que, as soon as. Rien que. although Pendant que while. I >e -..ne que, so thai. Tandis que, while. Jusqu'à re que, until. A lin que, so that. A moins que, unless. Pour que, in oilier that. De peur que, lest, for fear that. que, Avant que, before. Ou bien, or. Par con-, quent consequently. Aor< b que, Sana que, without. III. — The Interjection. The following is a list of the and exclamatory phra All l . /// / ( V, ! He bien I then/ Bhbii Wrllthen! sec herd it usual interjections Parbleu ! Courage ! Allons I Allons donc ! Bravo ! Forsooth ! Courage ! ('o»ie.' I Nonsense t Is that Bravo I {sot Practical French Course 149 Hélas ! Alas! Chut! Hush ! Holà! Hello! Vraiment ! Indeed ! Bien ! Well! Quoi ! What! Bon! Good! Comment ! How ! A la bonne heure ! Very well ! Dame ! Ah, well ! Gare ! Look out ! Tiens ! Hold! Attention ! Attention ! Tenez ! Behold ! Prenez garde ! Take care ! Miséricorde Mercy ! Mais oui ! Why yes! Mon dieu ! Good gracious ! Mais si ! Yes indeed ! Ma foi ! My faith ! Bis! Encore ! Silence ! Silence ! PRAC TICE. Avec moi. With me. Avec nous. With us. Avec lui. With him. Avec elle. With her. Avec eux. (m.) With them. Avec elles, (f ) With them. Avec plaisir. With pleasui After you. e. Après vous. Après cela. After that. Après déjeuner. After breakfast. Après dîner. After dinner. Après-midi. Afternoon. Without a do Sans doute. ubt. Sans peine. Without any trouble. Sans difficulté. Without any difficulty. Sans cesse. Without ceasing. Sans souci. Without care Why? Pourquoi ? Pourquoi pas ? Why not ? Pourquoi pleurez- vous ? Why do you cry ? Porquoi n'êtes-vous pas venu? Why did you not come ? C'est pourquoi (or) voilà pourquoi. Therefore, that is why. Parce que. Parce que je ne peux pas. Parce que je ne veux pas. Because. Because I cannot. Because I will no 150 Practical French Course Avant, before (for time). Devant, before (for place). Avant maintenant. Avant longtemps. Devant vous. Devant ma maison. Before now. Before long. Before {in front of) you. Before my house. Depuis, since (for time). Puisque, since, as, for the reason that. Depuis longtemps. Depuis ce temps-là. Depuis lors. Puisque vous le voulez ainsi. Puisque vous ne pouvez pas. Puisque c'est impossible. Since rk. Depuis qne je suis venu. Depuis qne je suis retourné. om, I un in New )'<>>£. Since / COUte. Since I returned Dés, front, beg in n in g, A partir de, front, starting from. Dès aujourd'hui. Dès maintenant. Dès demain. A partir d'aujourd'hui. /•';■(>/« Uhday. Front Ui>u on. From to-morrow. From this day forward. Practical French Course Aussitôt que (or) dès que, as soon as. 151 Dès que possible. Aussitôt que possible. As soon as possible. As soon as possible. Entre, between. Parmi, among, amid. Entre vous et moi. Entre nous. Entre deux et trois heures. Parmi nous. Parmi le nombre (or) Dans le nombre. Between you and me- Between us. Between two and three o'clock. Amongst us. Among the number. Among the number. Vers, towards (direction) about (time). Envers, towards (of people). Il allait vers la rivière. Elle allait vers le parc. Je viendrai vers cinq heures (or) Je viendrai vers les cinq heures. Il faut être poli envers les dames. He was going towards the river. She was going towards the park. I shall come around Jive o'clock. One must be polite towards the ladies Près de, near, close to. Auprès de, near, about. Prêt à (adjective), ready to. 152 Practical French Course Près de ma maison. Il demeure près d'ici. Restez auprès de moi. Je suis prêt à sortir. Near to my house. He lives close by. Slay near me {or by me). I am ready to go out. Durant, during (whole duration). Pendant, feuding, during. Pendant que, while. Durant sa vie. J'irai en Floride pendant l'hiver. Pendant que j'y suis. Pendant que vous y Êtes. Pendant que j'y pei During /lis life. [winter. I shall go to Florida during the H h He I am at it {or there). While you are at it {or there). While I think of it. Sur, upon. Sous, wider. Derrière, behind. Sur la table. Sur la cheminée Sur le perron. Sur le toit Sur ma parole. Sous || Sous : Derrière la porte De r ri èr e vous. Ipou the table. l 'pon the mantel-piece rp.'ti the stoop. Upon tir •id. I 'ndei : I rider the tree. Behind the door. Behind Dessus, Dessous, underneath. He. C'est an dessus de mes I Take that off the table. that from under the ehair. ond my strength. Practical French Course 153 Par dessus le marché. Par dessus le mur. Ci-dessus. Là dessus. Ci-dessous. Cent francs et au dessus. Into the bargain. Over the wall. {Here) above. Thereupon. {Here) below. One hundred francs and upward. En, in (countries, time, situation). Dans, in (into, within, at the end of). Je suis né en France en i860. J'espère que vous êtes en bonne santé. Rome n'a pas été bâtie en un jour. Dans une heure. In one hour. Dans un quart d'heure. In a quarter of an hour. Dans une demi-heure. In half an hour. Dans deux mois. In two months. Dans ma poche. In my pocket. Dans le tiroir. In the drawer. Dans la cuisine. In the kitchen. Dans le salon. In the parlor. Dans la salle à manger. In the dining-room. Dans la salle de bain. In the bathroom. Dans le corridor. In the hall. Dans l'armoire. In the closet. Dans l'escalier. In {on) the staircase. Dans la rue. In the street. Dans le jardin. In the garden. Dans le parc. In the park. Dans la cave. In the cellar. EXER CISE. 1. With much difficulty. 1. — difficulté. 2. With great pleasure. 2. — un — plaisir. 3. With the greatest pleasure. 3. — le plaisir. / was born in France in i860. I hope that you are in good health, Rome was not built in a day. 154 Practical French Course 4. After my lesson. 4 — ma — . 5. After my dinner. 5 — mon — . 6. Without you. 6 — vous. 7. Without him. 7 — lui. 8. Without her. 8 — elle. ç. Why do you not study ? 9 étudiez-vous — ? 10. U 'hy do you not tty f 10 essayez-vous — ? 11. Because I am too busy. 11 je suis — occupé. 12. Because 7 am tired. 12 fatigué. 1 j. Because it is useless. 13 inutile. 14. Before to-day. 14 — aujourd'hui. 15. Before the stove. >5 fourneau, (m. ) 16. Behind the curtain. 16 rideau, (m.) 1 j. Behind the screen. 17 paravent, (m.) 18. As soon as you can. 18 vous pourrez. ig. As soon as I can. 19 je pourrai. 20. .Year there. 20 là. 21. I shall come at about 2 o'clock. 21 Je viendrai — . 22. While :ce are at it. J 2 nous y sommes. 2j. In the bureau. »3 — — commode. 24. On the desk. M bureau, (m.) j>v In the pantry. *5 garde-manger, (m.) 2t>. In a moment. 96 — un moment. 9J. In the middle of the sti cet. -7 rue 28. Until t >>: 2 s demain. .v. As/or me. sg moi. jo. Closed on act ou tit of death. 30 Fermé décès. ?/. During the lesson. 3> leçon. ;.'. In tpiU ' 3a vous. Jj. In s/>ite of alt f hat. 33 cela. Imperfect Subjunctive of AVOIR, to have; ETRE, to be. That 1 might hare, etc Que I'MMM Que tu eusses Qu'il cut Que nous eussions Que vous eussiez Qu'ils eussent That I might ' Que Je fusse Que tu fusses Qu'il fût Que nous fussions Que vous fussiez Qu'ils fussent Practical French Course; 155 VINGT-QUATRIEME LEÇON, LESSON XXIV. PRACTICAL EXERCISE ON SOME INVARIABLE WORDS WHICH HAVE SEVERAL MEANINGS. Corresponds generally to the English prepositions «/and to, but in many cases it is used idiomatically and may be rendered in English by after, till, by, on. A mon regret. A droite. A gauche. A quelle heure dînez- vous ? Je dîne à six heures. A la française. A l'américaine. To my regret. To the right. To the left. At what time do you dine ? I dine at 6 o'clock. After the French fashion. After the American fashion. A bord. On board. A cheval. On horseback. A pied. Onfoot. A bicyclette. On a bicycle. A ce soir. Till this evening. A demain. Till to-morrow. A bientôt. ( Till) shortly. A tout à l'heure. {Till) by and by. Pas à pas. Step by step. Peu à peu. Little by little. Petit à petit l'oiseau fait son nid. Little by little the bird builds {up) her nest. 156 Practical French Course IMPORTANT REMARK. The preposition à is often used idiomatically between two nouns in the sense of used for, propelled by, made with. Une tasse à café. Une cuillère à café. Une brosse à dents. Une brosse à cheveux. Une épingle à cheveux. Une assiette à soupe. Une assiette à dessert. Une cuillère à bouche. Une cuillerée à bouche. Du papier à lettre. Une boite à lettres. Une chambre à coucher. Un bateau à vapeur. Un bateau à voiles. Une peinture à l'huile. Une tarn- à li crème. Une omelette an rhum. Du café au lait. A coffee-cup. A coffee-spoon. A tooth-brush. A hair-brush. A hair-pin. A soup plate . A dessert plate. A tablespoon. A tablespoonful. S>me letter-paper. A letter-box. A bedroom. A steamboat. A sail boat. An oil painting. A cream pie. A rum omelet. ( 'offee and milk. EN Corresponds generally to the English preposition /;/. but it is used idiomatically and maybe rendered in English by at, to, from there, of it, of thon, as or like, on, by. i*ii hives ; m été : en automne. En Europe : en Prance ; en prison. Bu traîneau. En voiture. Bu guo i<- ; en paix. Bn liberté ; en nourrice. ma de Paris? Oui, j'en suis In -winter; in summer; in autumn. f, . At t you from Paris? ■■: there) cm. Practical French Course 157 De temps en temps. De mal en pis. Avez- vous un crayon ? Oui, j'en ai un. Avez-vous des allumettes ? Oui, j'en ai. En partant. En arrivant. En débarquant. Un officier en civil. Je vous parle eu ami. From time to time. {Once in a while. ) From bad to worse. Have you a pencil ? Yes, I have one. Have you any matches ? Yes, I have some. On leaving. On arriving. On landing. An ununiformed officer. I speak to you as a friend. DE Corresponds generally to the English prepositions of and from. Le cheval de mon oncle. My uncle's horse, ( The horse of) L'automobile de mon ami. My friend' s automobile . La bicyclette de ma femme. My wife's bicycle. Je viens de Versailles. Versailles n'est pas loin de Paris. I come from Versailles. Versailles is not far from Paris. IMPORTANT REMARK. The name of the material of which an object is com- posed always follows, in French, the name of the object itself, the two words being connected either by the prepo- sition en or de. Une montre d'or (or) Une montre en or. Une montre d'argent (or) Une montre en argent. Une plume d'acier. A gold watch. A gold watch. A silver watch. A silver watch. A steel pen. 158 Practical French Course Un chapeau de paille. Une robe de soie. Des bas de laine. Des bas de coton. A straw hat. A silk dress. Wool stockings. Cotton stockings. QUE Corresponds generally to what and that, but it has several other meanings, being rendered into English, according to the sense of the phrase, by than, as, but or only, how, how much or how many, till, when, whether, why (exclamatory). Que pensez-vous de Paris? What do you think of Paris? Je pense que c'est la plus belle I think {that) it is the most beauti- ville du monde. fui city in the (of the) world. Il n'y a pas d'erreur ! (popular. ) There is no mistake about that. Fait-il aussi chaud qu'hier? Il fait plus chaud qu'hier. Ayez-vous de L'argent sur vous: Je n'ai que* cinq franca Combien de cigares avez-voua? Je D'en aï qu'un. Que vous t"u> .liinable ! Que vous 6tee 1 >« » 1 1 ' Qu'il fait ch.iii'l ! Que vous êtes jolie ' Oh ! que je vous aim- ' Que d'argent ! Que de monde ' Attendez que je vienne. I/annu qu'il neige. Que ne le faitea-vi Que n'y allez-vous ! Z$ it as warm as yesterday ? It is warmer than yesterday. Have you any money about y out I have but five francs. //<>:<' many cigars have y out I have but one. Htm kind you are ! How good you are ! How warm it is ! Hem pretty you are ! Oh! how 1 'love you I How much money ! (exclam.') Hem many people ! Wait till I come. ' was in Paris. 1 1 'he t her it rains or snows. Why don't you do it ! [exclam.) Why don't you go I Practical French Course 159 BIEN Corresponds generally to the English adverb well, but in many instances it is used idiomatically, and maybe ren- dered into English by very, quite, right, very much or very many and indeed. Je me porte bien. Tout va bien. Tout est bien qui finit bien. C'est bien. Je suis bien las. Je suis bien content. J'en suis bien aise. J'en suis bien fâché. C'est bien cher. C'est bien étonnant. C'est bien fait pour vous. Il fait bien chaud. C'est bien gentil de votre part. J'ai bien ri. Je me suis bien amusé. J'ai vu bien des pays. Bien des personnes. Il a bien promis qu'il viendrait, mais je ne crois pas qu'il vienne. Je vous le promets bien. Si vous le voulez bien. Je veux bien. I am well ; I have good health. Everything goes well. All is well that ends well. All right ; that's right. I am very tired. I am very satisfied. I am very glad of it. I am very sorry {for it). It is very dear. It is very astonishing. It serves you right. It is quite warm. It is very nice of you. I laughed very much. I enjoyed myself very much. I have seen many countries. A great many people. He certainly promised he would come, but I do not believe he will. I do promise (it to) you. If you are cuite willing, lam cuite willing. REMARK. The word bien is also used as a substantive in the sense of good, blessing, property, estate. 160 Practical French Course Le bien d'autrui. Cela fait du bien. Cela vous fera du bien. Il faut rendre le bien pour le mal. C'est un homme de bien. La santé est le bien le plus précieux. Les biens de la terre (or) d'ici-bas. The property of others. That does one good. That will do you good. We must render good for evil. He is an honest man. Health is the most precious of blessings. The good things of the earth. SI Corresponds to the English words if\ whether t so. Si c'est possible. Si je peux. Si vous pouvez. Si le temps le permet. S'il fait beau temps. S'il vous plait Je ne sais si je pourrai venir ou non. Il fait si chaud ' !><>n ! C'est une si bonne liKratioii . je oc suis pas si bête ! ^pop. ) If it is possible. If lean. If you can. If the weather permits. If it Ù fine weather. If you please. I do not know whet her I shall be able to COM4 or not. It is so warm .' It is so good/ It is so good a location. I am not so foolish ! POUR. The word pour, as already seen, corresponds to the English preposition for % but it is also used in the sense of to, in order to and per. I'our <|iii ett ceci ? pOUT v.us. Il faut manger pom vivre. J'ai dit cela pour plaisanter. hem is this t It is for you. One must eat to live. I said that in jest. Practicai, French Course 161 Pour parler et écrire correctement en français il faut savoir à fond la grammaire française. Les caisses d'épargne paient le trois et demi pour cent. Le pour et le contre, (subst.) In order to speak and write cor rectly in French, 07ie must know {the) French grammar thoroughly. The savings banks pay three and a half per cent, {interest). Pro and con. PAR Corresponds to the English prepositions by, per, through. It serves also to form many idiomatic expressions. Qu'avez-vous lu ? What have you read? J'ai lu les " Trois Mousquetaires, " I have read the " Three Guards- par Dumas, père, et "Cyrano men," by Dumas, the elder, and de Bergerac," par Edmond Ros- "Cyrano de Bergerac," by tand. Edmond Rostand. Combien payez- vous par jour ? Combien payez-vous par semaine i Par où êtes- vous entré ? Je suis entré par la fenêtre. Cela ne vaut rien. Jetez-le par la fenêtre. Par où faut-il passer ? Par ici. Par là. Par ici la sortie. Par ci, par là (or) Ça et là. Par amour. How much do you pay per day f How much do you pay per week ? How did you get in ? I got in through the window. That is not Throw it out of the window. Which way must one go f This way. That way. This way out. Here and there (or) so so. Here and there. For love. OU. The word ou (unaccented) corresponds to the English conjunction or. 162 Practical French Course Tôt ou tard. Tout ou rien. Maintenant ou jamais. Plus ou moins. Mort ou vif. Sooner or later. All or nothing. Now or never. More or less. Dead or alive. OU (accented) Corresponds generally to the English adverb where, but it is also used idiomatically in the sense of in, which and when. Où demeurez- vous ? Où avez-vou^ Le danger ou vous êtes. !.!■ mi cle to the last minute. From the first to the last. EXERCISE /. To my great regret. 3. Turn to your right, j. J shall come at one O'clock. i. — mon — regret. i. Tournes votre — . 3. Je viendrai . Practical French Course 163 He is in (at) Paris. I shall go on foot. We will go on horseback. Give me a coffee-cup. Give me a cup of coffee. My friend' s father is sick. A gold bracelet. A silk hat. What do you think of Miss Xt I think she is charming. How nice ! I am so tired ! She is very pretty . She is so pretty ! Where is he ? He is in {at) Paris or London. Good-bye ; till to-morrow. A French lesson. My sister's bicycle. A silver watch. A wooden chair. What do you think of me ? What do you think of her ? It serves him right. It serves her right. What do you wish ? What do you say ? What did you say ? Are you sorry for it ? I am sorry for it. We laughed very much. 4. II est . 5. J'irai . 6. Nous irons — — . 7. Donnez-moi . 8. Donnez-moi — — . 9. Le père — est malade. 10. Un . 11. Un . 12. — pensez-vous — Mlle X ? 13. Je pense — elle est charmante. 14. — c'est gentil ! 15. Je suis — lasse ! (f.) 16. Elle est . 17. Elle est — jolie ! 18. — est-il ? 19. Il est . 20. Au revoir ; . 21. de français. 22. L,a bicyclette ■ 23. Une montre . 24. de bois. 25. de moi ? 26. d'elle? 27. C'est bien fait . 28. C'est bien fait . 29. — désirez-vous? 30. — dites-vous? 31. — avez- vous dit? 32. — êtes- vous fâché ? 33. J' — suis fâché. 34. Nous avons . Imperative of AVOIR, to have; ETRE, to be. Aie, have thou Ayez, have you Ayons, let us have Qu'il ait, let him have Qu'elle ait, let her have Qu'ils aient, let them have Qu'elles aient, let them have Sois, be thou Soyez, be you Soyons, let us be Qu'il soit, let him be Qu'elle soit, let her be Qu'ils soient, let them be Qu'elles soient, let them be 164 Practical French Course VINGT-CINQUIEME LEÇON, LESSON XXV. REMARKS ON THE RIGHT USE .OF SOME PRACTICAL WORDS. DAY. MORNING. EVENING. The words day, morning and evening are translated in French by jour, matin and soir (m.) when one refers to any part of the day, morning or evening, and also after the words tous, every ; chaque, each ; ce, this or that. They are translated by journée, matinée, soirée, (f.) when one wants to express the whole duration of the day, morn- ing or evening. Chaque JOUI Tous les jours. Ce jour. Il a fait une belle journée. Il a plu toute la journée. J« viendrai demain matin, Je partirai à huit heures du matin. Each day. Every day. T/i/s day. It has been a fine day. It has rained all day long. I shall come to-morrow morning. I shall leave at S o'clock a.m. Je viendrai dans la matinee. J'ai travaillé toute la matinée. NOM viendrons ce soir. Nous partirons à huit heures du soir. / shall come in the forenoon. I have -worked all the morning. ll'c will i omc tonight. We will leave at S o'clock p.m. Venez passer la soirée avec nuis. J'ai passé une très agréahle soirée. [us. Come and spend the evening with I haie spent a very pleasant evening. Practical French Course 165 YEAR. The word year is translated in French by an (m.) for a definite number of years, and by année (f.) for an indefinite number, for interrogative sentences and after an ordinal number. Il y a deux ans. Deux ans après. J'ai vingt ans. En quelle année êtes-vous né ? Je suis né en l'an 1880. l,a même année. Je vous souhaite une bonne année. Two years ago. Two years after. I am twenty years old. In what year were you born ? I was born in the year 1880. The same year. I wish you a prosperous year. PARENTS. RELATIVES. The French word parents (pah-rahng) means both parents and relatives. The word relations means only social or commercial acquaintances. Comment se portent vos parents ? Nous sommes parents. Un proche parent. Un parent paternel (or) du côté de mon père. Un parent maternel (or) du côté de ma mère. Nous sommes en relations d'affaires. How are your parents? We are related. A near relative. A relation on my father's side. A relative on my mother's side. We are commercially related. FATHER=IN=LAW, STEPFATHER, ETC. The words father-in-law, step-father, and all similar words, are rendered in French by the same expression. 166 Practical French Course Beau-père. Beau-frère. Beau-fils. Belle -mère. Belle-sœur. Belle-fille. Father-in-law (or) step-father. Brother-in-law (or) step-brother. Son-in-law (or) step-son. Mother-in-law (or) step-mother. Sister-in-law (or) step-sister. Daughter-in-law (or) step- daughter. PIECE. The English word piece is translated in French by morceau, for a material portion of something, and for music. The French word pièce is used for coins, theatri- cal plays, rooms, and (speaking of price) a piece, each. A piece of bread. A puce of music. A five franc piece. An amusing play. This is a fine room. An apartment of six rooms. How much for one t ( >nc franc a piece | or ) each. I"n morceau de pain, rn morceau de musique. I'm- pièce tie cinq francs. I *n<- pièce amusante. Ceci est une belle pièce. I'm appartement «le six pièces. Combien ts pi l'n franc pièce. LECTURE. The English word lecture is translated in French by conference. The Fren< h word lecture means reading. Je \.iis entendre one conference. l'n conférencier. ['n livre de lecture l'n Cabinet ,rn. not hair been. IV. — How to Conjugate Verbs Interrogatively. Verbs arc conjugated interrogatively by placing the nominative pronoun after them, or by using the expression Practical French Course 179 est=ce que (is it that) before the nominative pronoun followed by the verb. MODEL OF INTERROGATIVE FORM. FIRST FORM. Suis-je? Ami? Ne suis-je pas ? Am I not ? Est il? Is he? N'est-ilpas? Is he not? Somines-nous ? Are we ? Ne sommes-nous pas ? Are we not ? Etes-vous ? Are you ? N'êtes- vous pas ? Are you not ? Sont-ils? Are they? Ne sont-ils pas ? Are they not ? SECOND FORM. Est-ce que je suis ? Est-ce que je ne suis pas? Est-ce qu'il est? Est-ce qu'il n'est pas? Est-ce que nous sommes ? Est-ce que nous ne sommes pas ? Est-ce que vous êtes? Est-ce que vous n'êtes pas ? Est-ce qu'ils sont? Est-ce qu'ils ne sont pas; EXERCISE FOR TRANSLATION. 1. WasI? (imperfect.) 2. Was he not ? 3. Was she not ? 4. Had you ? 5. Had you not ? 6. Were we ? 7. Were you? 8. Were you,, not ? 9. Had I not? 10. Had we ? 11. I had. 12. We had. 13. Shall I be? 14. Shall T have ? 15. Will you be? 16. Will you have? 17. I shall not be. 18. I shall not have. 19. Would you be ? 20. I would be. 21. Would she have ? 22. She would not have. 23. Are you not ? 24. Have you not ? i8o Practicai. French Course VINGT-SEPTIEME LEÇON. LESSON XXVII. PRACTICAL EXERCISE on the verb Etre, to be. PRELIMINARY OBSERVATION. The two parts of the French negative (ne pas) are used conjointly before a verb in the infinitive, or before the objective pronoun, which may precede the verb in the infinitive. être, voilà la Pour ne pas vous déranger. Etre, ou ne | question Je rais charmé de voua voir. Je suis enchanté de \<>us \<>ir. Je suis bien aise de vous voir. Otre frère ? Il est sorti. • votre aœur 3 -t s,.rtie. ut pc* parents? □l ■-'.iit sortis . ils sont absents. Ils sont à la campagne. On sont vos scaurs } BUea sont .m bord «le la mer. Elles sont i l'étranger. V'o be, or not to be, that is the question. Xot to disturb you. f am delighted to see you, I am very pleased to see you, I am very glad to see you. Where is your brother? tie is i fone) out. H 'here is your sister f She is (gome) out. U lure arc your parents ? /'hey are (gone) out. They are away. They are in the country. U here are your sisters f They are at the seashore. 'They are abroad. Practical French Course 181 Elles sont en Allemagne. Elles sont à Berlin. Etes- vous content de moi ? Je suis très content de vous. Etes-vous satisfait de mes progrès en français ? Oui, vraiment ; j'en suis très satisfait. Votre fils est-il au collège ? Non, il est en vacances. Votre petite sœur est-elle à la maison ? Non, elle est à l'école. Où est la femme de chambre ? Où est la bonne ? Elle est en haut. Elle est en bas. Où est le concierge ? Il est dans le sous-sol. Il est dans la cave. Il est au rez-de-chaussée. Où sont les enfants ? Ils sont sur le perron. Ils sont sur le trottoir. Ils sont dans la rue. Ils sont dans la cour. Ils sont dans le jardin. Avez- vous déjeuné? Pas encore. Je suis à jeun. A propos, où étiez- vous hier soir ? They are in Germany. They are hi Berlin. Are you pleased with me ? I am very much pleased with you. Are you satisfied with {of) my progress in French ? Yes, indeed; lam very well satisfied (with it). Is your son at college ? No, he is on his vacation. Is your little sister at home? No, she is at school. Where is the chambermaid ? Where is the children's maid? She is upstairs. She is downstairs. Where is the janitor ? tie is in the basement. He is in the cellar. He is on the ground floor. Where are the children ? They are on the stoop. They are on the sidewalk. They are in the street. They are in the back yard. They are in the garden. Have you had your breakfast ? Not yet. I have not had my breakfast. (I am fasting.) By the way, where were you last night ? 182 Practical French Course J'étais au théâtre. Y avait-il beaucoup de monde ? La salle était comble. La pièce était-elle intéressante ? Oui, en vérité. Avez-vous été chez monsieur X ? J'en viens. Etait-il chez lui ? Non, il n'y était pas. Où était-il? Il était à son bureau. Avez-vous vu vos amis? Non, ils n'étaient pas chez eux. Où étaient-ils? Ils étaient au théâtre. Seres-voua chez vous demain ? Oui, je serai chez moi toute la journée. Je serai bien aise de voua voir. Je serai bien aise ir. il si-r.i bien aiae cK- voua voir. Bile Bera bien aiae de vou Da seront bien li^t- 'it- voua voir. Noua serons très heureux de vous voi r. l'ai été treao ■ Bile a été très Burprise, Noua m ona été très peines. Vous .!<,,-/ , t, m s heureux. Ils ont > t ti< - contents. / was at the theatre. Were there many people there ? The house (hall ) was crowded. Was the play interesting ? Yes, indeed. Have you been to Mr. X*s ? I have just been there. Was he at home .' No, he was not (th. Whete was he? He rcas at his office. Have you seen your friends ? .V(>, they were not at home. Where were they ? They were at the theatre. Will you be at home to-morrowt ) 'es, / shall be at home all | the) day /<>>tf. / shall be very eiad to see you. /shall I him. I shall be very glad to see her. I shall them. v %lad to see \,>u. 1 ! • see you, ■ We wilt be very happy to fee you. He has been very \icJk. much surprised. We have been very much grieved You hat I fortunate, /'hey were very plea Practical French Course 183 Je serais très heureux de le voir. Il serait enchanté de vous voir. Elle serait très heureuse de faire votre connaissance. Nous serions très heureux de recevoir votre visite. Restez un peu plus. Je le voudrais, mais je ne puis. Il faut que je sois chez moi à deux heures précises. Soyez attentif, (m.) Soyez attentive, (f .) Soyez prompt. Soyez exact. Soyez ponctuel. Soyez sage ! Soyez un bon garçon ! Soyez une bonne fille ! Ne soyez pas fâché ! Ne soyez pas de mauvaise humeur. I should be very happy to see him. He would be delighted to see you. She would be very happy to make your acquaintance. We would be very happy to receive your visit. Stay a little longer. I should like to, but I cannot. I must be (it is necessary that I be) at home at 2 o'clock sharp. Be attentive. Be attentive. Be prompt. Be exact. Be punctual. Be good! (of children.) Be a good boy ! Be a good girl ! Don't be angry ! Don't be cross ! (in bad humor.) IDIOMATIC EXPRESSIONS FORMED WITH THE VERB Etre. Je n'y suis pour personne. Madame n'y est pas. Vous y êtes ! Vous n'y êtes pas ! J'y suis ! Où en êtes-vous ? Je ne sais où j'en suis. Voulez-vous être des nôtres ? Si j'étais de vous. Il n'en est rien. Je n'en suis plus. Je suis gêné. Je vous suis redevable. / am at home to no one. Madam is not at home. You have it ! (There you are !) That's not it ! I have it ! Where are you (at) ? I do not know where I am (at). Will you be one of us ? (Join us.) If I were you. It is nothing of the sort. I cry off ! (I quit !) I am uncomfortable. I am indebted to you. i84 Practical French Course Je ne suis pas en train. Je suis sur les épines. Je suis sur le point de partir. Je suis à vous dans un moment. C'est à vous de parler. En êtes-vous encore là ! Cela n'est pas ! C'en est fait de lui ! Nous sommes de moitié ! Je ne suis pas dans mon assiette Hé bien, soit ! Ainsi soit-il ! / am not in the mood. I am ill at ease (on thorns.) I am about to leave. I shall be with you in a moment. It is for you to speak. Do you still believe that ! It is not so ! It is all over with him ! We go halves ! I am not myself! Well, let it be so! So be it ! Amen ! EXERCISE FOR TRANSLATION. H CONSTRUCTION. FRENCH CONSTRUCTION. I. Is your brother married ? I. 2. Is your wife Preach? 2. A Are my brothers here? 3* 4- Are my sisters here ? 4* 5- Where are your friend's parents ? 5* & Was Mr. Smith at ho:ne ? 6. 7- Was Mr<. Smith at home? 7- 8. Were your BOIlfl at home? 8. 9- Will your father be at home? 9* in. [a DOt that man very rich ? IO. I 1. Is not that lady very pretty? 1 1. \2. Are not those boj s la/y ? 12. 'A At what time will yon be here? ■A 't- At what time will your husband Ik* at home ? M- is- At what time will yoni friend'fl mother lie at home? 15- It.. Do n< ,{ Ik* in such a hurry. 1 6. 17- Is it x 1 } • :• IS. Was it jm,. h! ? 18. «9 What is U? 19- M. Is it correct ? 20. Your brother, is he married ? Your wife, is she French? My brothers, are they here? My sisters, are they here? Where are the parents of your friend ? Mr. Smith, was he chez lui f Mrs. Smith, was she chez elle t Your sons, were thi Your father, will be he chez lui? That man, is he not \ery rich ? That lady, is she not verypretty? Those 1m. ys, are they not la/.y ? At what hour will l>e you here? At what hour your husband will be he chez lui / Atv.hat hour the mother of your friend will be she chez elle t Be not so hurried. Is it that it is Is it that it was tfood? What is it that it is? Is it that it is correct? Practical French Course 185 VINGT-HUITIEME LEÇON, LESSON XXVIII. PRACTICAL EXERCISE on The verb Avoir, to have. I.— WE SAY IN FRENCH : Avoir faim, to have hunger, for To be hungry. Avoir soif, to have thirst, for To be thirsty. Avoir somineil, to have sleep, for To be sleepy. Avoir chaud, to have warmth, for To be warm. Avoir froid, to have cold, for To be cold. Avoir peur, to have fear, for To be afraid. Avoir honte, to have shame, for To be ashamed. Avoir raison, to have reason, for To be right (of people). Avoir tort, to have wrong, for To be wrong (of people). II.— WE SAY IN FRENCH : Avoir besoin, to have need, for Avoir soin, to have care, for Avoir pitié (de), to have pity, for Avoir coutume (de), to have custom for Avoir envie (de), to have desire, for Avoir sujet (de), to have subject, for Avoir lieu (de), to have cause, for Avoir lieu, to have place, for Avoir mal (à), to have pain, for Avoir l'air, to have the appearance, for Avoir de la chance, to have luck, for Avoir bonne mine, to have a healthy appear Avoir quelque chose, to have something for To need. To take care. To pity. To be in the habit. To feel like. To have reason for. To have cause for. To take place. To have a pain. To look (as if). To be lucky, mice, for To look well, something to be the matter. i86 Practical French Course III.— WE SAY IN FRENCH: Moi aussi {I also), For so have I, so am I, so do I, so did I, etc. Ni moi non plus (nor I either), For neither have I, rieilFier am I, neither do I, etc. PRACTICE. J'ai faim. J'ai soif. J'ai sommeil. J'ai chaud. J'ai froid. J'ai peur. J'ai honte. J'ai raison. J'ai tort. Avez-vous faim ? Oui, j'ai faim. Moi aussi. N'avez-vous pas soif: Si, j'ai très soif. Moi aussi. Je n'ai pas sommeil. Ni moi non plus. Je n'ai pas faim. Ni moi non plus. Si vous avez faim, mangez. Si vous a\ <•/ soif, trayez. Si tous avec sommeil, dormes. Si vous av./ froid, chauffe/vous. Si vous ave/ cllau.l, ôte/ paletot. N'ai-je pas raison ? Si, vous ave/ parfaitement I am hungry. I am thirsty. I am sleepy. F am warm. F am cold. I am afraid. (F have hunger.) (I have thirst) (I have sleep.) [I have warmth.) (I have cold. ) ( I have fear. ) F am ashamed. | / have shame. ) I a m right. ( / ha vc right. ) I am wro ng . (I haven •> v ng. ) U hungry' Yes, I am. N<> ,;;/; /. . ire you not thirsty ? )V.s, / am very thirsty. S> am F. F am not sleep v. Neither am F. F am not hungry. S either a m I. if you are hungry, eat. If you are thirsty, drink. {f you are sleepy, sleep. ay cold, warm yourself If you are warm, take off your coat. tm F not > i.eht ' ) . you an p<-> /< ctly right. Practical French Course 187 Ai-je tort ? Non, vous n'avez pas tort. Avez-vous besoin de quelque chose ? J'ai besoin de beaucoup de choses. De quoi avez-vous besoin ? J'ai besoin d'un chapeau. J'ai besoin d'un gilet. J'ai besoin d'un paletot. J'ai besoin d'un pantalon. J'ai besoin d'un nouveau costume. J'ai besoin d'une paire de souliers. J'ai besoin de gants. Avez-vous tout ce dont vous avez besoin ? Oui, j'ai tout ce dont j'ai besoin. Vous avez bonne mine. Je me sens bien. Vous avez mauvaise mine. Vous avez l'air malade. Je ne me sens pas bien. Qu'est-ce que vous avez? J'ai mal à la tête. J'ai mal à la gorge. J'ai mal à l'estomac. J'ai mal aux dents. J'ai un violent mal de tête. J'ai la fièvre. J'ai une terrible névralgie. J'ai pris froid. J'ai un gros rhume. Un rhume de poitrine. Un rhume de cerveau. Je suis enrhumé. Am I wrong ? No, you are not wrong. Do you need something f I need many things. What do you need ? I need a hat. I need a vest. I need a coat. I need trousers. I need a new suit. I need a pair of shoes. I need gloves. Have you all you need? Yes, I have all I need. You look well. I feel well. You look bad. You look ill. I do not feel well. What is the matter with you ? I have a headache. I have a sore throat. I have a pain in the stomach. I have a toothache. I have a violent headache. I am feverish. I nave a terrible neuralgia. I have taken cold. I have a severe cold. A cold in the chest. A cold in the head. I have a cold. i88 Practical French Course Je suis enrhumé du cerveau. Ayez soin de vous-même. Cet homme est à plaindre. J'ai pitié de lui. Qu'est-ce qu'il a? Il est aveugle. Il est estropié. Il est sourd et muet. J'ai de la chance. J'ai beaucoup de chance. Je n'ai pas de chance. J'ai eu de la chance. J'ai eu beaucoup de chance. Je n'ai pas eu de chance. La réunion aura lien demain soir. La cérémonie aura lieu ce soir. Le mariage (or la noce) aura lieu demain matin. Le baptême aura lieu dimanche après la messe. L'enterrement aura lieu cette après ini'li au cimetière Les funérailles <>r les obsèqnea auront lieu demain matin. La réunion n'a pas eu lieu ; elle a été renvoyée à dimanche pro- chain. Comment vont lea affaires > Très bien, en vérité. Je n'ai pas lieu or sujet | de me plaindre. Tant mieux. I have a cold in my liead. Take {have) care of yourself. That man is to be pitied. I pity him. What is the matter with him ? He is blind. He is a cripple. He is deaf and dumb. I am lucky. I am very lucky. /am not lucky. I have been lucky. I have been vox lucky. I have not been lucky. The meeting wilt lake place lo-mor- row evening. The ceremony will take place this evening. The wedding will take place to- morrow morning. The christening will take place on Sunday after mass. '/'lie interment will take place this afternoon at cemetery. The funeral will take place to-mor- rOW morning. The meeting did not take place ; it postponed until Sunday next. How is busn: ■,/, indeed. I have no reason for complaining. So much the better. Practical French Course 189 IMPORTANT REMARKS. I. The English expressions to be good tempered, to be bad tempered, are rendered in French by avoir bon carac- tère, avoir mauvais caractère. Character is, in French, renommée, réputation. Il a un mauvais caractère. Elle a un très bon caractère. Un homme de mauvaise réputation. Une femme de mauvaise réputation. He is bad tempered. She is good tempered. A man of bad character. A woman of bad reputation. 2. Avoir, to have, followed sition de before a verb in the J'ai envie de fumer. J'ai envie de dormir. J'ai envie d'aller au théâtre. Je n'ai pas le temps de sortir. Je n'ai pas le temps d'y aller. J'ai coutume de me lever de grand matin. J'ai l'habitude de me coucher très tard. Je n'ai pas l'honneur de vous connaître. J'ai l'honneur de vous saluer. by a noun, takes the prepo- infinitive. Ifeel like smoking. Ifeel like sleeping. Ifeel like going to the theatre. I have not the time to go out. I have not the time to go (there). I am in the habit of rising very early in the morning. I am in the habit of going to bed at a very late hour. I have not the honor of knowing you. I have the honor to salute you. 3. Avoir, to have, requires the preposition à before a verb in the infinitive. Qu'avez- vous à faire ? J'ai beaucoup à faire. What have you to do ? I have much to do. 190 Practical French Course Je n'ai rien à faire. Je n'ai absolument rien à faire. Qu'avez- vous à dire ? Je n'ai rien à dire. Vous n'avez rien à dire. / have nothing to do. I have absolutely nothing to do. What have you to say? I have nothing to say. You have nothing to say. 4. To have something left is rendered in French by avoir de reste or rester (the latter used impersonally). Combien avez- vous de reste ? J'ai vingt sous de reste. Je n'ai rien de reste. Combien vous reste-t-il ? Il me reste vingt francs. 11 ne nie reste rien. How much hair you left ? I have twenty cents left. I haze nothing left. How much have' you left? 1 have twenty francs left. I have nothing left. 5. The age in French is expressed with the verb avoir. In speaking of old people, the adjective â>;é, aged, is more respectful than the words vieux (m.), vieille (t.), old. Quel Age ave/- m >us ' J'ai vingt ans. J'ai un .111 île plus que \mis. Quel â^e a t-il ? il a quarante ans. Il a trois ans de plus que nmi. J'aurai trente ans demain. Il aura i|iiin/e ans K- premier mai prochain. Mon jure est ti.-s , Ma mère est très âgée. Ma fête de naissance. ./ are you t tarn twenty years old. I am one year older than you. How old is he ■' //, is forty. He is three years older than I. be thirty to-morn He Will be fifteen on the tu May ne 1 /. Myfathet is very old. My mother is , .1/1 birthday. Practical French Course 191 IDIOMATIC EXPRESSIONS FORMED WITH THE VERB Avoir. Je n'ai pas de quoi. Il a de quoi satisfaire ses goûts. Il n'y a pas de quoi. J'ai beau faire. Vous avez beau dire. Vous avez beau pleurer. Vous auriez beau pleurer. / have not the means. He has the means to satisfy his tastes. Don't mention it. {There is noth- ing to it.) I try in vain. You speak in vain. You cry in vain. You would cry in vain. EXERCISE FOR TRANSLATION. He is hungry. I was thirsty. She is sleepy. He is right. (*) What does he need ? What does she need ? He looks well. He looks sick. He has a headache. She is feverish. 11. You are lucky. 12. You are not lucky. 13. You have been lucky. 14. At what time will the meeting take place ? 15. That boy is bad tempered. 16. That girl is good tempered. 17. How old is your boy ? 1. He has hunger. 2. I had thirst. 3. She has sleep. 4. He has reason. 5. Of what has he need ? 6. Of what has she need ? 7. He has good appearance. 8. He has the air sick. 9. He has pain in the (à la) head. 10. She has the fever. 11 You have (some) luck. 12. You have no luck. 13. You have had (some) luck. 14. At what hour the meeting will it (she) take place ? 15. That boy has a bad temper. 16. That girl has a good temper. 17. What age has your boy? (*) In speaking of things, right and ivrong are translated idiomatically by bon, mauvais, correct, bien, mal, juste, convenable. Ex.: C'est bien, c'est juste, c'est mal, ce n'est pas bien. We also say idiomatically : L,'homme qu'il faut. I/endroit d'une étoffe. L,' envers d'une étoffe The right man. The right side of (diy) goods. The wrong side of {dry) goods. 192 Practical French Course VINGT-NEUVIÈME LEÇON LESSON XXIX. REGULAR VERBS. I. — General Notions. There are in French three regular conjugations. Each conjugation is distinguished by the termination of the verb in the infinitive. The 1st conjugation has the infinitive ending in er, as parler, to speak. The 2d conjugation has the infinitive ending in Ir, as finir, to finish. The 3d conjugation has the infinitive ending in re, as vendre, to sell. Two parts must be distinguished in the French verbs : the radical or essential part, ordinarily invariable, and the termination or accidental part, generally variable. The radical is what remains of a verb in the infinitive, after its termination has been cut off. Thus : The radical of the verb parler is pari. The radical of tin- verb finir is fin. The radical of the verb vendre is vend. IMPORTANT REMARK. For the purpose of simplification, in our table of conju- gations, some tenses and persons of the verb finir are formed by prefixing finiss, from the present participle finissant, finishing. Practical French Course 193 All verbs of the second conjugation are formed in the same way, some tenses being formed from the infinitive, and some from the present participle, as will be readily seen from the table. OBSERVATION. Old grammars contain a fourth conjugation comprising the verbs ending in oir, as recevoir, to receive. But inas- much as these verbs are only five in number, namely: apercevoir, to perceive ; décevoir, to deceive ; concevoir, to conceive ; devoir, to owe ; we have followed the ex- ample set by modern grammarians, and placed them among the irregular verbs. II. — Hints for Conjugating the Regular Verbs. (1.) HOW TO FORM THE IMPERFECT. The imperfect is formed by adding to the radical of the verb the terminations of the imperfect of the verb avoir; viz. : — ais, — ais, — ait, — ions, — iez, — aient. (2.) HOW TO FORM THE FUTURE. The simplest way of forming the future is to add to the verb in the infinitive the terminations of the indicative present of the verb avoir; viz. : — ai, — as, — a, — ons, — ez, — ont. i94 practical French Cotjrse (3.) HOW TO FORM THE CONDITIONAL. The simplest way of forming the conditional is to add to the verb in the infinitive the terminations of the imperfect tense of the verb avoir; viz. : — ais, — ais, — ait, — ions, — iez, — aient. (4.) HOW TO FORM THE FIRST AND SECOND PERSONS OF THE IMPERATIVE. The first and second persons, plural, of the imperative are the same as the corresponding persons of the indicative present, minus the personal pronouns : Nous parlous, toe Speak. Parlous, let US speak \'"ih parlez, you speak. Park-/, speak. The second person, singular, of the imperative is the same as the corresponding person of the indicative present, minus the personal pronoun : Je park-, / Jpeak. Park-, Speak (thou). REMARK. The following table has been so arranged that the student can see at a glaiue how, in fact, the three regular conjugations may be reduced into one, the terminations being perfectly alike in most tenses and persons. Practical French Course III. — Conjugation of the Regular Verbs. 195 MODEL VERBS. First Conjugation. Second Conjugation. Third Conjugation. INFINITIF PRESENT. Pari er, to speak, \ Fin ir, to finish. | Vend re, to sell. PARTICIPE PRÉSENT. Pari ant, speaking. | Finiss not, finishing. | Vend ant, selling. Pari é, spoken PARTICIPE PASSÉ. I Fin i, finished. | Vend u, sold. INDICATIF PRÉSENT. I speak, I finish, Isell, I am speaking. I am finishing. I am selling. Je pari e. Je fin is. Je vend s. Tu es. Tu is. Tu s. Il e. Il it. Il Nous — ons. Nous finiss ons. Nous — ons. Vous — ez. Vous — ez. Vous — ez. Ils — ent. (*) Ils — ent. Ils — ent. (*) Ent is silent when it marks the third person plural of a verb. However, if the next word begins with a vowel, the final t is sounded and carried over. 196 Practical French Course IMPARFAIT. / was speaking, or used to speak. /was finishing, or used to finish. / was selling, or used to sell. Je pari ais. Tu als. Il ait Je finiss ais. Tu ais. 11 ait. Je vend ais. Tu ais. 11 alt Nous — ions. Vous — iez. Ils — aient (ay). Nous — ions. Vous — iez. Ils — aient (ay). Nous — ions. Vous — iez. Ils — aient (ay). PASSÉ DÉFINI. This tense is only narrative, and therefore not used in ordinal)- conversation. / sfioie, or did speak. F finished, or did finish. / sold, or did sell. Je pari ai. Tu as. Il a. Je fin is. Tu Is. 11 It. Je vend is. Tu is. 11 it Nous — âmes ahm . Vous — fltes aht . Ils — erent air Nous îmes eem). Mea eet . ire nt eer). Nous — îmes (eem). Vous Itea lis — irent (eer). PUTUR. / shall. / shall t or will finish. /shall, or will sell. Je parler al. To as. 11 a. Je finirai. Tu as. Il - a. Je vendr ai. Tu as. Il a. Nous — ons. OK. Ils — ont. Nous — ons. Voua — ez. Ils — ont. Nous — ons. Voua ez. Ils - ont. Practical French Course CONDITIONNEL. 197 I would, or should speak. Je parlerais. Tu ais. Il ait. Nous — ions. Vous — iez. Ils — aient (ay). I would, or should finish. Je finir ais. Tu ais. Il ait. Nous — ions. Vous — iez. Ils — aient (ay). / would, or should sell. Je vendr ais. Tu ais. Il ait. Nous — ions. Vous — iez. Ils — aient (ay). SUBJONCTIF PRESENT. That I may speak. That I may finish. That I may sell. Que je pari e. Que je finiss e. Que je vend e. Que tu — — es. Que tu es. Que tu es. Qu'il e. Qu'il e. Qu'il e. Que nous — ions. Que nous — ions. Que nous — ions. Que vous — iez. Que vous — iez. Que vous — iez. Qu'ils — ent. Qu'ils — ent. Qu'ils — ent. IMPARFAIT DU SUBJONCTIF. This tense is always formed from the past definite. That I might speak. That I might finish. That I might sell. Que je pari asse. Que je fin isse. Que je vend isse. Que tu asses. Que tu - — isses. Que tu isses Qu'il ât. Qu'il - — ît. Qu'il ît. Que nous — assions. Que nous — issions. Que nous — issions. Que vous — assiez. Que vous — issiez. Que vous — issiez. Qu'ils — assent. Qu'ils — issent. Qu'ils — issent (as) (iss) (iss) r 9 8 Practical French Course IMPÉRATIF. Pari e, speak (thou) Pari ez, speak {you). Pari ons, let us speak. Fin is, finish (s.) Finiss ez, finish (pi.) Finiss onsjet us finish Vend s, sell (s.) Vend ez, sell (pi.) Vend ons, /W us sell. IV. — Compound Tenses. The compound tenses of active verbs are formed, as in English, by combining the past participle with the dif- ferent tenses (simple) of the verb avoir, to have. PASSÉ INDÉFINI. This tense being the most used (it always replaces the past definite in ordinary conversation), we will conjugate it in full, but will give only the first person singular of the Other tenses, as from that the other persons can easily he formed. J'ai parlé fnti <>u vendu . Tu as parlé. il ;i parlé. Elle a ; Nous avons parlé. Voua avei parlé. ll> <>nt parlé. Klk-s ont parlé. / have spoken I finished or sold). Thou host spoken. He has spoken. She has spoken. We have Spoken. You kave spoken. >>:. have spoken, ■■.•■ tpoken. J'avaifl parlé, t-tc. PLUS QUB PARFAIT. | I had spoken or been speaking. J'eus parlé, etc. J'aurai parlé, etc. J'aurais parlé, etc. Que j'aie parlé, etc. Practical French Course PASSÉ ANTÉRIEUR. | I had spoken. 199 FUTUR ANTERIEUR. | I shall have spoken. CONDITIONNEE PASSE. I / would have spoken. SUBJONCTIF PASSÉ. I That I may have spoken. PEUS-QUE- PARFAIT DU SUBJONCTIF. Que j'eusse parlé, etc. | That I might have spoken. Avoir parlé. Ayant parlé. INFINITIF PASSE. | To have spoken. PARTICIPE COMPOSE. I Having spoken. EXERCISE FOR TRANSLATION. ENGLISH CONSTRUCTION. 1. Do I speak well? 2. Does lie speak French ? 3. Does she speak English FRENCH CONSTRUCTION. i. Is it that I speak well ? 2. Speaks he French ? (or) Is it that he speaks French ? 3. Speaks she English ? (or) Is it that she speaks English ? Practical French Course 4. Do we speak ? 5. Do they speak ? (m.) 6. Did I speak ? 7. Didst thou speak ? 8. Did he speak ? 9. Did we finish ? 10. Did she finish ? 11. Did they sell ? 12. I do not speak. 13. I did 1 1 « »t .speak. [4. She did not selL 15. We did ma finish. iG. They did not speak. 17. Shall I ever speak Preach? you like French ? • ., Do you speak i<> me i 20. 1 -peak t.. you. 21. To whom arc \"ii Bpeaking ? 22. To whom did you speak ? 2 v T<> whom were you Bpeaking? 24. At what time did you finish ? 25. I >i> 1 she Speak to yon } 26. She spoke to me. 27. 1 Bpoke to her. 28. What art- you Belling? 2.,. what does he Bell ? 30. I am through. Speak we ? (or) Is it that we speak ? Speak they ? (or) Is it that the}' speak ? Have I spoken ? (or) Is it that I have spoken ? Hast thou spoken ? (or) Is it that thou hast spoken ? Has he spoken ? (or) Is it that he has spoken ? Have we finished ? (or) Is it that we have finished ? lias she finished? (or) Is it that she has finished? Have they sold? (or) Is it that they have sold ? I s;, ik not. I have not spoken. She has not sold. We have not finished. They have Dot spoken. Shall speak I ever French? Like you the l'reiich? 1 To : me speak you ? I to you Bpeak. To whom speak you ? To whom have you spoken ? To whom spoke you? At what hour have you finished ? To yOU has she spoken ? She to me lias spoken. I to her have spoken. What Bell you ? What sells he? I have finished. àm&%> Practical French Course TRENTIÈME LEÇON, LESSON XXX. I. — Verbs of the First Conjugation. The following verbs ending in er belong to the first conjugation and therefore must be conjugated after the model verb parler. Those governing a preposition before another verb in the infinitive are followed by that preposition : Abandonner, Acheter. Adresser, Agacer, Agréer, Aimer, Ajouter, Allumer, Amener, Apporter, to abandon. Appeler, to buy. Appliquer, to address. Arrêter, to irritate. Arriver (à) to accept. to like or to love. Arroser, to add. Atteler, to light. Atténuer, to bring (people.} Attirer, to bring ( things.) Avaler to call. to apply. to stop, to arrest. to arrive, or to succeed. to sprinkle. to hitch up a horse. to extenuate. to attract. to swallow. Badiner, Bailler, Balayer, Baiser, Baisser, Bavarder, Bercer, Boucher. to trifle, to joke, to yawn, to gape, to sweep. to kiss, to lower. to prattle, to gossip to rock, to lull, to cork (bottles). Bouder, Bouger, Brider, Briser, Broder, Broncher, Brosser, Brûler, to pout, to sulk. to stir, to budge. to bridle. to break (to pieces). to embroider. to stumble, to trip. to brush. to burn. Practical French Course Cacher, to hide, to conceal. Coller, to paste. Cacheter, to seal up. Commander (de , to order. Cajoler, to cajole. Commencer (à), to begin. Caresser, to caress. Compter, to count, or Casser, to break. to intend. Cesser (de), to cease. Conjurer (de), to implore. Chanter, to sing. Continuer (à), to continue. Châtier, to chastise. Copier, to copy. Chercher, to look for, Couper, to cut. or to try. Cracher, to spa. Cirer, to black (boots). Crier, to cry out \to yell. Danser, to da nee. Dicter, tc dictate. Dater, to date. Diminuer, to diminish. Déboucher, to uncork [bottles). Discontinuer (de), to discontinue ueter, to unseal t tetters . Discuter, to discuss. Décider, to decide. I distinguer, to distinguish. Déchirer, to tear. Dmiipter, to tame, or Demander . t ), to ask. to subdue. Demeurer, , to dwell. Donner à , to g roe. I dépenser, to spend (m Dorer, 1, ■ gild. Désirer, Douter, to doubt. Deviner, ./ess. Durer, E Encadrer, to to last. Ecouter, to listen. frame y a picture). Ecraser, to et us//. Ennuyer, to annoy. ' ;//, to efface. Enseigner a 1 to teach. Effleurer, ~e. Envoyer, to send. Effraj '.ten. Bpeler, to spell. to mislay. Epouser, to marry, to espouse. igner, tch, Ik claw. Epousseter, to dust. Bmbi to em! Bssayer de , to try, to attempt. Emmener, to take Essuyer, to wi^e. ( people or animals ). Estropier, to cripple. Bmpi to starch. Etouffer, to choke. Employer A , to tmj, Etrangler, to strangle. ' Emporter, Eviter (de , /" at ( thing Exciter - à , to excite. Emprunter, to bt'i ■ to exact. Practicai, French Course; 203 Fatiguer, to tire. Fortifier, to fortify, or Faufiler, to baste. to strengthen. Feuilleter, to turn over {pages). Fouetter, to whip. Fermer, to close tip, to shut. Frapper, to knock. Flageller, to cowhide. Fréquenter to frequent. Flâner, to idle, to lounge. Friser, to curl. Flatter, to flatter. Frissonner, to shiver. Forcer (de), to force. Fumer, to smoke. Former, to form. Fusiller, to shoot, Formuler, to formulate. (to execute militarily). Gager, to lay a wager. Goûter, to taste. Gagner (à) to gain, to win. Graisser, to grease. Garder, to keep. Gratter, to scratch. Gaspiller, to waste, to squander. Gronder, to scold. Glisser, to slip. Guider, to guide. Habiller, to clothe. Habiter, to inhabit. Harnacher, to harness. Hausser, to raise, to lift up. Hériter, to inherit. Hésiter (à), to hesitate. Honorer, to honor. Huiler, to oil. Imaginer, Imiter, Importer, Imprimer, Incorporer, Indiquer, Informer, to conceive, to imitate, to import, to print, to incorporate, to indicate, to inform. Insinuer, Insister, Insulter, Intéresser, Interroger, Inviter, Inventer, to insinuate, to insist, to insult, to interest, to interrogate, to invite, to invent. Jeter, to throw. Jouer, to play. Juger, to judge. Jurer (de), to swear. Labourer, to plough. I Lever, to arise. Lâcher, to let go, to release. I Libérer, to liberate. 204 Practical French Course isser, to leave, to let. Lier, to tie up. ver, to wash. Livrer, to deliver. cher, to lick. Lorgner, to ogle. Mâcher, to masticate. Manœuvrer, to maneuver. Manger, Manier, Manifester, Manquer, Marteler, Maugréer Marcher, to cat. to handle. to manifest. to miss, to fail. tii hammer. to curse and swear. to walk. M Marquer, to mark. Mêler, to mix up. Mener, to lead, to take to. Mériter (de), to deserve. Modifier, to modify. Monter, to go up, to mount. Montrer, to show. Mouiller, to wet, to moisten. Murmurer, /<> murmur, toçrumblc. Nager, to swim. Négliger, to neglect. Négocier, to negotiate. Nier, to deny. Niveler, to level. Notifier, to notify. Noter, to note. Nommer, to name, to nominate. Nouer, to knot. Noyer, to drown. Objecter, to object. Obliger à 01 de . t • oblige, ( observer, to i < >fl\n offend. Opérer, '.rate. Opposer, to oppose, ( ordonner, I <1< - 1, to order. to dare, to venture. Oter, to take off. Oublier de), to forget. Panser, to dres Plaisanter, to jest, to joke Pardonner, five. Pleurer, V, to weep. Parier de . to bet. Plier, to fold. Passer, to pa\s, to spend Porter, to carry, to wear. time . to place Patiner, to skate. der, to pOSSi SS, : pour , ■ to lend, to loan. Penser (à) to think. Prier de , to pray. Pécher, to sin. Priver, to deprive. Pêcher, to fish. Profiter, to profit. i to ;i Prononcer, to pronounce. Practical French Course Q Quêter, to collect money {alms). I Questionner, to question. Quereller, to quarrel. ! Quitter, to quit, to leave. 205 •Ramasser, to pick tip. Regretter (de), to regret. Ramer, to row {boat). Rejeter, to reject. Ramener, to bring back {people). Remuer, to stir up. Ramper, to crawl. Rentrer, to re-enter. Rappeler, to recall. Renvoyer, to send back. Rapporter, to bring back {things). Répéter, to repeat. Raser, to shave. Reprocher, to reproach. Réciter, to recite. Rester, to remain, to stay. Reculer, to fall back, to recoil. Retirer, to withdraw, or Redouter, to dread. lo draw {money). Refuser (de) lo refuse. Retourner, to return. Regarder, to look at. Rêver, to dream. Saigner, to bleed. Siffler, to whistle. Saler, to salt. Soigner, to nurse. Saluer, lo salute. Songer (à), to think. Sauter, to jump. Sonner, to ring {the bell). Scier, to saw. Soulever, to lift up. Secouer, to shake up. Soupirer, to sigh. Semer, to sow. Suer, to sweat. Séparer, to separate. Supposer, to suppose. Serrer, to squeeze, to tighten. Surveiller, to look after, to watch Taquiner, to tease. Transpirer, to perspire. Tirer, to pull {the trigger), Travailler (à), to work. to shoot. Traverser, to cross. Tourner, to turn. Trembler (de) to tremble. Tousser, to cough. Tricher, to cheat. Torturer, to toHure. Tromper, to deceive. Tourmenter to torment. Trouver, to find. Tracasser, to annoy. Tuer, to kill. 206 Practical French Course V Veiller, to watch, to sit up. Venger, to avenge. Verser, to pour, to shed {tears). Vider, to empty. Viser, to aim. Visiter, to visit. Voler, to fly, or to steal. Voyager, to travel. II. -Remarks on the Spelling of Some Verbs of the First Conjugation. i Verbs ending in the infinitive in cer, as avancer, take a cedilla under the ç before the vowels a, o: Il avança, he advanced ; nous avançons, we advance. 2. Verbs ending in ger, as voyager, take a mute e after the letter g, to soften it, before a and o: Il voyagea, ke travelled ; nous voyageons, we travel. 3. The verbs appeler, to call ; jeter, to tin 1 and t before a mute e ; J'appelle, I call; Je jette, f throw. J'appellerai, I shall call; Je jetterai, I shall throu double the 4. Verbs ending in yer, as envoyer, to send; essayer, to try ; change the letter y into i before a mute e: J'envoie) F send; J'essaierai, I shall try. 5. Verbs having a mute e in the penultimate syllable of the infinitive take a grave accent over that e before a syllable containing a mute e: Amener, to bring ; J'amène, I bring ; J'amènerai, I shall bring. Practical French Course 207 6. Verbs having é before the final syllable of the infin- itive change the acute accent into a grave accent before a syllable beginning with a mute e: Espérer, to hope ; J'espère, / hope ; J'espérerai, I shall hope. HI. — Verbs of the Second Conjugation. The following verbs ending in ir belong to the second conjugation, and therefore they must be conjugated after the model verb finir: Abolir, to abolish. Jouir (de), to enjoy or possess. Accomplir, to accomplish. Languir, to languish. Assortir, to sort, to match. Maigrir, to get thin. Agir, to act, to do. Obéir, to obey. Agrandir, to enlarge. Pâlir, to become pale. Avertir, to warn, to inform of. Punir, to punish. Bâtir, to build. Rajeunir, to grow young again. Chérir, to cherish. Réfléchir, to reflect, to think. Choisir, to choose. Remplir, to replenish, to fulfill. Compatir, to sympathise with. Réussir, to succeed. Définir, to define. Rôtir, to roast. Démolir, to demolish. ■ Rougir, to blush. Désobéir, to disobey. Salir, to soil, to stain. Emplir, to fill up. Trahir, to betray. Gémir, to groan, to -moan. Unir, - to unite. Grandir, to grow, to grow tall. Vernir, to varnish. Grossir, to grow stout. Vieillir, to grow old. Guérir, to cure, to recover. Vomir, to vomit. IV.— Verbs of the Third Conjugation. The following verbs ending in re belong to the third conjugation, and therefore must be conjugated after the model verb vendre : 208 Practical French Course Attendre, to wait for, ot- Mordre, to bite. to expect. Pendre, to hang. Confondre, to confound. Perdre, to lose. Correspondre, to correspond. Prétendre, to pretend. Corrompre, to corrupt. Répandre, to spread, to spill. Défendre, to defend, to forbid. Répondre, to answer. Descendre, to descend. Revendre, to sell again. Etendre. to spiwid, to expand. Rendre, to render, to give back. Entendre, to hear. Tendre, to stretch. Fendre, to split. Tondre, to shear. Fondre, to >nelt down. Tordre, to twist, to wring: V. — Exercises for Translation. ] i. Do you like ? 1. Lit. : Like you? (or, is it that you like ? ) 2. Does he like ? S. Likes he ? 3. i ). ils she like- ? & Likes she ? 4. Do they like? 1. Like they ? 5. l)o I pronounce well? 5- Is it that I pronounce well ? '.. 1 >•> ;.<>u sing ■ 6. Sing you ? 7. Do you dance . :■ Dance you ? B, 1 )o you play ' 8. Play you 1 y. 1 >i'l \<>u find '. 9- 1 [ave you found? to. Did lu- bay '. 10. Has he bought ? 1 1. Did slu- si u.i; ' ii. 11. is she suii),' ? 12. Diil they win ? \2. Have they won? I 1. lit- is building a new theatre. I. I. He builds a new theatre. 2. She is ^ruuiug tall. 2. She gTOWl tall . 3. I shall punish you. 3- I you shall punish. 4. He will punish you. 4- He yon \sill punish. 5. She would punish me. 5- She me would punish. 6. Why do you hlush ? 6. Why hlush you? Practical French Course 209 7. Do not blush. 8. Which do you choose ? 9. Which did you choose ! 10. I enjoy good health. 11. He has cured me. 12. I have done my duty. Blush not. Which (m.s.) choose you? Which (f.s.)have you chosen? I enjoy of a good health. He me has cured. I have fulfilled mon devoir. III. I. What are you waiting for ? 1. What is it that you wait (for)? 2. Did you wait for me ? 2. Me have you waited (for) ? 3- Do you hear ? 3- Hear you ? 4- Do you hear it ? 4- It hear you ? 5- Did you not hear me ? 5- Me have you not heard ? 6. I forbid you. • 6. I you it forbid. 7- How much did you lose ? 7- How much have you lost ? 8. I shall defend you. 8. I you shall defend. 9- What did he answer ? 9- What has he answered ? [O. Come down ! 10. Descend ! [i. Is the first book finished ? 11. The first book is he finished ? [2. Yes, it is. 12. Yes, he is finished. MAXIMES ET REFLEXIONS. 1. La conscience est la voix de l'âme; les passions sont la voix du corps, (y. J. Rousseau) 2. I^a conscience est un juge placé dans l'intérieur de notre être. (Sêgur) 3. I^es conseils agréables sont rarement des conseils utiles. (3/assillon) 4. Ceux qui donnent des conseils sans les accompagner d'exemples, ressemblent à ces poteaux de la campagne qui indiquent les chemins sans les parcourir. {Rivarol) 5. C'est lorsque nous sommes éloignés de notre pays, que nous sentons surtout l'instinct qui nous y attache. {Chateaubriand') 6. Ceux qui gouvernent sont comme les corps célestes qui ont beaucoup d'éclat et n'ont point de repos. 7. La nature nous a donné deux oreilles et une bouche, afin que nous écoutions beaucoup et que nous parlions peu. 210 Practical French Course TRENTE ET UNIEME LEÇON, LESSON XXXI. The Use of the Tenses. THE INFINITIVE. I. A verb preceded by another verb is put in the infinitive present (except the two auxiliaries avoir and être). prendre un bain. Voulez-vous sortir avec moi ? Je ne peux pas voir. Je ne peux pas y aller. Je désire parler, comprendre, lire et écrire le fran / ami going to take a bath. Will you go out -u it h me? Iianuots.it-. I eau not go there. I desire to speak, understand, read au J write the French language. 2. The infinitive is used in French after certain verbs, which arc, in English, joined to other verbs by the con- junction and. Aile/, chercher le médecin. Aile/ voir un docteur. Allez me chercher nn journal. Venez me voir. (,\> and bring the physicien. Go auif see a d<>< tor. (/<> and get me a newspaper» Come and see me. Practical French Course 211 3. Some verbs, which practice will teach, govern verbs in the infinitive with the preposition à or de. J'aime à parler français. Je commence à comprendre. Je n'ai rien à faire. J'ai peur de vous déranger. Je regrette de vous déranger. J'ai oublié de prendre mon livre. J'ai oublié de l'apporter. / like to speak French. I begin to understand. I have nothing to do. Oth( / am afraid to disturb you. I regret to disturb you. I have forgotten to take my book. I forgot to bring it. 4. The French prepositions (except en, in) do not gov- ern the present participle as in English, but the infinitive present. Sans sortir. Sans courir. Sans rire. Sans plaisanter. Avant de commencer. Avant de manger. Avant de boire. Avant d'aller au lit. Après avoir dîné. Without going out (to go out). Without running (to run). Without laughing (to laugh). Without joking (to joke). Before commencing (to begin). Before eating (to eat). Before drinking (to drink). Before going (to go) to bed. After having (to have) dined. 5. The infinitive of a verb is sometimes used substan- tively, as in the following examples : Le lever du soleil. Le coucher du soleil. Au lever du soleil. Le boire, le manger et le dormir sont nécessaires. The sunrise. The sunset. At sunrise. Drinking, eating and sleeping are necessary. 212 Practical French Course Je ne Je ne Je ne Je ne Je ne Je ne Je ne Je ne Je ne Je ne sais que dire. sais que faire. sais que manger. sais que boire. sais que répondre. sais que penser. sais qu'acheter. sais lequel choisir. sais où aller. sais comment faire. PRACTICE. I do not I do not I do not I do not I do not I do not I do not I do not I do not I do not Je ne puis y aller. Je ne puis le dire. Je De saurais vous le dire, i id, ) Je n'ose le dire. Je a'ose le faire. Je De veux pas le Savoir. Je ne veux pas \<>us déranger. Voulez-vous prendre un verre avec moi ? Très volontiers. Que désirez-vous prendre? N'importe quoi. Le même que von*. Voulez-vona fumer un cigare i Avec plaisir. Voulez-vous me donner du feu, s'il vous plaît? Certainement. Merci beaucoup. De rien, monsieur. Aves-VOUS jamais été en Kurope know what to say. know what to do. know what to eat. know what to drink. know what to answer. know 'what to think. know what to buy. know which to choose, know where to go. know what to do. I cannot go there. I cannot say it. I cou Id not tell you. I date not say it. I dare not it. I do not want to know it. I do not want to disturb you. Wilt you have (take a glass) a drink -with met I 'try willingly. What wilt you have t ( What do i on wish to take ?) No matter what. MM a-i you. Will you smoke a cigar ? // it h pleasure. Will you please give me a light lire ) f < ertainly. Thank you very much. Xot at all, >ir. Have you ever been to Europe? Practical French Course 213 Jamais ; mais j'espère y aller bientôt. Quand comptez-vous partir ? Je compte partir le mois prochain. Quand comptez-vous être de retour ? Je compte être de retour à New York vers la fin du mois de sep- tembre ou au commencement d'octobre. Voulez-vous sortir et faire une promenade avec moi ? Je le voudrais, mais je ne puis ; j'attends du monde. Qu'avez- vous à faire ? J'ai beaucoup à faire. Je n'ai rien à faire. Je n'ai absolument rien à faire. Qu'est-ce que vous avez à dire ? Je n'ai rien à dire. Parlez-vous français ? Je commence à parler. Aimez- vous à parler français ? Oui, je l'aime beaucoup. Qui avez-vous vu ? J'ai vu mon ami. Il m'a invité à déjeuner. J'ai vu mes amis. Ils m'ont invité à dîner avec eux. Pourquoi ne venez-vous pas me voir plus souvent ? Never ; but I hope to go there soon. When do you expect to leave ? I expect to leave next month. When do you expect to be back ? I expect to be back in New York by the end of September or the beginning of October. Will you go out and take a walk with me ? I should like to, but I cannot ; 1 expect company. What have you to do ? I have much to do. I have nothing to do. I have absolutely nothing to < What have you to say ? I have nothing to say. Do you speak French ? I am beginning to speak. Do you like to speak French ? Yes, I like it very much. Whom have you seen ? I have seen my friend. He has invited me to lunch. I have seen my friends. They have invited me to dine with them. Why do you not come to see me oftener ? 214 Practical French Course J'ai peur de vous déranger. Avez-vous apporté votre livre i J'ai oublié de l'apporter. Je vous prie de m'excuser. Il me tarde de vous voir. (*) Il me tarde de dîner. Il me tarde d'aller au lit. Il me tarde de pouvoir parler français. Il me tardait de fumer. Il me tardera de vous voir. J'ai envie de dormir. Je n'ai jm> envie de sortir. J'ai intention d'aller en Europe. Je n'ai pas l'honneur de vous connaître. Je n'ai pas le plaisir de le connaître. Que me conseille/.-vous de faire ? Je vous conseille d'attendre. Je suis obligé de vous quitter. Je suis obligé de partir ror-le- chainp. I am a/raid to disturb you. Have you brought your book? I have forgotten to bring it. I beg you to excuse me. I long to see you. I long to dine. I long to go to bed. J long to be able to speak French . I was longing for a smoke. I shall be anxious to see you. I feel like sleeping. I do not feel like going out. [ intend to ,; r c to Europe. m 7 the honor of knowing you. tot the pleasure of know- ing him. What do you advise me to do I F OM obliged to leave you. I am obliged to I a; e at once. • The penonal pronoun il in "il me tarde" means/., the verb be- ing used impersonally. EXERCISE FOR TRANSLATION. ENGLISH CONSTRICTION. FRENCH CONSTRICTION. i. Has your hnsband ever béna bo i. Your husband, has he ever been 1 -in rope? in Burope ? 2. Never; l>ut he hopes to go there a. Never; but he hopes there to soon. go soon. Practical French Course; 215 3. When does he expect to leave ? 4. Does your brother like to speak French? 5. Does not your sister begin to speak French ? 6. Has your brother brought his book? 7. He has forgotten to bring it. 8. I beg you to excuse him. 9. I am very glad to see you. 10. I shall be very glad to see him. 11. I should be very glad to speak French. 12. 1 am very sorry to disturb you. 13. I am very happy to know you. 14. I am obliged to go home. 15. Does your brother speak French ? 16. He commences to speak. 17. Will you please give me a glass of cold water ? 18. Will you have the kindness to give me a glass of ice water ? 19. Come and see us. 20. I shall go and see you. 21. I long to eat. 22. I long to drink. 6. When expects he to leave? Your brother, likes he (à) to speak French ? Your sister, begins she not (à) to speak French ? Your brother, has he brought his book ? 7. He has forgotten of it to bring. 8. I you beg of him to excuse. 9. I am very happy of you to see. 10. I shall be very happy of him to see. 11. I should be very happy of to speak French. 12. I am very sorry of you to disturb. 13. I am very happy of you to know. 14. I am obliged of to go chez moi. 15. Your brother, speaks he French ? 16. He commences (à) to speak. 17. Will you, if you please (to) me to give a glass of water fresh? 18. Will you (to) have the good- ness of (to) me to give a glass of water iced ? 19. Come us to see. 20. I shall go (J'irai) you to see. 21. 77 me tarde of to eat. 22. Il me tarde of to drink. MEMORY EXERCISE. Aucun chemin de fleurs ne conduit à la gloire. {La Fontaine) Qui veut parler sur tout, souvent parle au hasard. (Andrieux) translation: No flowery path leads to glory. Who (he who) wishes to speak on every subject, speaks often at random. 216 Practical French Course TRENTE-DEUXIÈME LEÇON, LESSON XXXII. -The Present Participle. I. The present participle is generally invariable, and always ends in ant. Etant, being. Ayant, having. Voyant, seeing. En, in, is the only preposition governing the present participle. I mi chantant, in singing. En pleurant, in i tying. ■\. The present participle is sometimes used adjectively. It then follows the rules for adjectives, agreeing in gender ami number with the substantive to which it r i>Mi>;eant, Tinit boy is very obliging. Cette tUl.- est trêa obligeante, That girl is very obliging. 4. The present participle is never used, in French, with the auxiliary être, to express th.it the action is or was instan- taneous. Instead, the indicative present or the imperfect in their Simple form .ire used. Thus we say : Je vais, fgO, for I am going. il étudie, he studies, for he is studying. Il étudiait he studied, for //'• was studying. Practical French Course 217 However, if necessary, the same precision may be at- tained as in English by using the following idiomatic form; II est (*) à étudier (or) Il est en train (t) d'étudier. Il était à étudier (or) Il était en train d'étudier. (*) The word occupé, busy, is understood, (t) En train de means in the act of. PRACTICE. Etant très pressé, je ne puis rester plus longtemps. A mon grand regret, je suis obligé de vous quitter. Ayant lu votre annonce dans le " Herald " de ce jour, et désir- ant prendre des leçons de fran- çais, voulez-vous avoir la bonté de passer chez moi demain, dans la matinée, ou si vous préférez, l' après midi ? Vous avez déjà une bonne con- naissance de la langue française. Vous vous perfectionnerez en lisant, en écrivant, en allant parmi les Français, en convers= ant avec eux, en faisant des ex- ercices, en traduisant, en un mot, en pratiquant autant que pos- sible. h& pratique rend parfait. En voyageant on apprend beau- coup. Being in a great hurry, I cannot stay any longer. To my great regret, I am obliged to leave you. Having read your advertisement in to-day's "Herald," and de- siring to take French lessons, will you have the kindness to call on me to-morrow in the morn- ing, or if you prefer, in the afternoon ? You have already a good knowl- edge of the French language. You will perfect yourself by read- ing, by zvriting, by going among the French, by conversing with them, by (making) exercises, by translating, in a word, by prac- ticing as much as possible. Practice makes perfect. In traveling one learns a great deal. 218 Practical French Course Le voyage est une grande école. Traveling is a great school. En débarquant au Havre vous trouverez à la bibliothèque de la gare le New York "Herald," édition de Paris. En arrivant à Paris, vous serez surpris de trouver une ville si belle, si propre et si gaie. Aimez- vous les couleurs voyantes? Non, je ne les aime pas. Ni moi non plus. Je termine ma lettre en vous em- brassant affectueusement. Donnez-moi bientôt de vos nou- velles, et en attendant, croyez- moi, je vous prie, Bien & VOUS, Votre tout dévoué m. I, Votre toute dévouée (f. I. On landing at Havre you ivillfind the Parisian edition of the New York "Herald" at the railroad station bookstand. On arriving in Paris, you will be surprised at finding such a beau- tiful, clean and gay city. Do you like loud colors ? No, I do not like them. Neither do I. With an affectionate kiss I close my letter. Let me hear from you very soon, and in the meantime, helieve me. Yours truly, Yours very truly. II.— The Pa5t Participle. I. When used without auxiliary, the past participle agrees in gender and number with the noun to which it refers, like the adjectives. L'an passe. La semaine passée. La lune eat comme une lampe d'ot dana l'azur suspendue. The past year ; last year. The past rceek ; last week. the moon is tike a golden lamp suspended in the azure vault. Practical French Course 219 I v a lune est comme une pièce d'or jetée dans l'espace par des amoureux pour acheter le silence de la nuit. The moon is like a piece of gold thrown into space by some lovers to buy the silence of the night. 2. The past participle, used with the auxiliary être, agrees in gender and number with the subject of the verb, whether the subject be placed before or after it. Il est mort. Bile est morte. Ce livre est bien écrit. Cette lettre est mal écrite. Il est découragé. Bile est découragée. Mes amis sont découragés. Mes sœurs sont découragées. Votre cigare est éteint. Votre cigarette est éteinte. Votre gilet est déboutonné. Votre robe est décousue. Votre robe est déchirée. Mes gants sont tachés. Il a été condamné à mort. Bile a été acquittée. Ils ont été pardonnes par le pré- sident de la République. La porte est-elle fermée ? Non, elle est ouverte. Avez vous vu le tombeau dans lequel sont enfermées les cen- dres de Napoléon I ? He is dead. She is dead. This book is well written. This letter is badly written. He is discouraged. She is discouraged. My friends are discouraged. My sisters are discouraged. Your cigar is out (the light of). Your cigarette is out. Your vest is unbuttoned. Your dress is ripped. Your gown is torn. My gloves are stained. He has been sentenced to death. She has been discharged (legally). They have been pardoned by the President of the Republic. Is the door shut f No, it is open. Have you seen the tomb in which the remains of Napoleon I. are inclosed ? 220 Practical French Course 3. The past participle, used with the auxiliary avoir, agrees in gender and number with its direct regimen or object, when that regimen precedes the participle, but not when it follows it. Avez-vous ouvert la fenêtre ? Oui, je l'ai ouverte. Avez-vous fermé la porte ? Oui, je l'ai fermée. Avez-vous brossé mes habits? Oui, je les ai brossés. Avez-vous étudié votre Le<,on ? Oui. je l'ai étudiée. Avez-vous reçu ma lettre? Oui, je l'ai reçue. Avez-vous traduit vos exercices? Oui, je les ai traduits. Avez-vous vu vos .nuis-' Oui, JL- les ai VUS. J'ai reçu et lu avec un extrême plaisir la charmante lettre que vous m'avez écrite en français. Je suis lu.-un.-ux de dire qne je l'ai parfaitement comprise. Have you opened the -window t Yes, I have opened it. Have you shut the door ? }'es, I have closed it. Have you brushed >ny clothes? Yes. I haze brushed thon. Have you studied your lesson t Yes, I have studied it. Have you received my letter f )'es, I haze received it. Have you translated your exercisest Yes. I have translated them. :/ seen your friends t Yes. 1 have seen them. I have received and read with evli eme pleasure the charming letter which you have written me in French. I am pleased to say that I have understood it per- EXERCISE FOR TRANSLATION. BMGUSB CON S T R UCTION. 1. is y.mr brother married ' 2. Are your brothers married ? v [1 vour sisti-r married ? 4. Art- vour sisters marrie. 1 ' FRENCH CONSTRUCTION. Vour brother, is he married ? Vour brothers, are they married? Vour sister, is she married? Your sisters, are they married? Practical French Course 221 5. Did you receive the book which I sent you ? 6. Did you receive the letter which I sent you ? 7. Did you receive the books which I sent you ? 8. Did you receive the flowers which I sent you ? 9. The book you sent me is very interesting. 10. The method you lent me is very interesting. 11. Did I show you the bracelet which my husband gave me for my birthday ? 12. Did I show you the gold watch which my brother gave me for my birthday ? Have you seen the rings which my husband brought me from Paris ? I am studying. I am looking for my gloves. She is singing. She is crying. On leaving. 19. On arriving. 20. In the meantime. 13 5. Have you received the book which I (to) you have sent ? 6. Have you received the letter which I (to) you have sent ? 7. Have you received the books which I (to) you have sent ? 8. Have you received the flowers which I (to) you have sent ? 9. The book which you (to) me have sent is very interesting. 10. The method (f.) which you (to) me have lent is very inter- esting. 11. (To) you have I shown the bracelet that my husband (to) me has given for my fête of birth? 12. (To) you have I shown the watch of gold which my brother (to) me has given for my birthday ? 13. Have you seen the rings which my husband (to) me has brought from Paris ? 14. I study. 15. I search (for) my gloves. 16. She sings. 17. She cries. 18. In departing. 19. In arriving. 20. In waiting. MEMORY EXERCISE. Ce que l'on comprend bien s'énonce clairement. (Boileau) L'homme le plus obscur aime la liberté. {Chateaubriand) L,e bonheur des méchants comme un torrent s'écoule. {Racine) translation: That which we understand well, we express clearly. The most humble man loves liberty. The happiness of the wicked runs away like a torrent. 222 Practical French Course TRENTE-TROISIEME LEÇON. LESSON XXXIII. I. — The Present of the Indicative. I. The indicative present has only one form in French. Thus, for instance, these three English modes of expres- sion, / speak, I am speaking, I do speak, have but one translation, to wit : Je parle. The student must, therefore, be very careful to avoid such translations as the following : Btes-vous venant? for Arc you coming ? Je suis venant, for I am coming. Où fites-VOUfl allant? for Where arc you going f l<- rais allant for F am going Qn'êtes-vons faisant? for What are you doing t Je suis travaillant. for T am Working. The above and all similar phrases must be translated in the following manner : TOUS ' Je vk-ns. Où allez- vous? Je vais Que faites- vous? Je travaille Lit.: c 'orne you f I come. 1. it. : H here go you ? I go ... 1. it. : U 'hat do you f I work. 2. The indicative present may be used in place of the future to express something that is going to take place or to be done. Practical French Course 223 Thus, for example : Je pars ce soir. Il part demain. Je suis à vous dans un moment. I leave (shall leave) this evening. He leaves (zvill leave) to-morrow. I am (shall be) with you in a moment. PRACTICE. Où es-tu ? Où êtes- vous ? Je suis ici. Où vas-tu ? Où allez- vous ? Je sors. Je vais au parc. Que fais-tu ? (or) Qu'est-ce que tu fais ? Que faites- vous ? (or) Qu'est-ce que vous faites? Je travaille. Je lis. J'écris. Où est votre frère ? Il est en bas. Que fait-il ? (or) Qu'est-ce qu'il fait? Il travaille. Il lit. Il écrit. Que cherchez vous ? ■(or) Qu'est-ce que vous cherchez ? Je cherche mes gants. Où demeurez- vous ? (or) Où est-ce que vous demeurez ? Je demeure à New York. Where art thon ? Where are you ? I am here. Where art thou going? (goest thou) Where are you going ? (go you ) / am going otd. (I go out. ) I am going (1 ~gv) to What art thou doing? (dost thou) What aft thou doing ? What are you doing ? (do you) What are you doing ? I am working. (I work.) I am reading. (I read. ) I am writing. (I write.) Where is your brother? He is downstairs. What is he doing ? (does he) What is he doing? He is working. (He works.) He is reading. (He reads.) He is writing. (He writes.) What are you looking for ? (search you) What are you looking for ? I am looking (I search) for my gloves. Where do you live ? (live you) Where do you live ? I live in New York. 224 Practical, French Course Où demeure-t-il ? Oà demeure-t-elle ? Où demeure votre ami ? Pourquoi pleurez-vous ? De quoi riez- vous ? De qui riez- vous ? Je ne ris de personne. Que voulez-vous? (or) Qu'est-ce que vous voulez: Je ne veux rien. Que veut-il ? Qu'est-ce qu'il veut ? Il veut de l'argent. Que regardez- vous? Je regarde l;i parade. Qui attendez- vonfi ? J'attends le facteur. Que prenez-VOtU ]><>ur déjeuner Je prends du cale au lait. Parlez-vous français ' Je parle assea pOW nie taire comprendre. Where does he live ? (lives he) Where does she live ? Where does your friend live f 11 'hy do you cry f (cry you) What arc you laughing at t (laugh you at) Whom are you laughing at ? I am laughing (I laugh) at no one. II 'hat do you u ant f t a ur si-ter doing ? 7. she :- dancing. 8. Where i> he K"'"K 3 y. Where is sh<- going P 10. I was hungry. 11. I was thirsty. 12. I had company . PRBNCH CONSTRUCTION. 1. He has hunger. 2. She has thirst. u h ive reason. .}. What does your brother? 5. 1 Ii- smokes. 6. What does your sister? 7. She da:). 8. Wlnrr goes he ? y. Where goes she ? 10. I h.nl bun I 1. I had thirst. 12. I had some monde, {va..) Practical French Course 227 What was your brother doing? He was smoking. What was your sister doing ? She was working. Where did you live in Paris ? Formerly, I used to smoke a great deal. Did you see your friend ? 20. What was he doing ? 21. He was working. 22. He was studying his lesson. 23. He was reading the newspaper. 24. He was writing a letter. 25. Did you see your friends? (m.) 26. What were they doing ? 27. They were working. 28. They were playing. 29. Where are you going ? 30. I am going home. 13. What did your brother ? 14. He smoked. 15. What did your sister? 16. She worked. 17. Where lived you at Paris? 18. Formerly, I smoked much. 19. Have you seen your friend ? 20. What did he ? 21. He worked. 22. He studied his lesson. 23. He read the newspaper. 24. He wrote a letter. 25. Have you seen your friends ? 26. What did they ? 27. They worked. 28. They played. 29. Where go you ? 30. I go chez moi. MEMORY EXERCISE. I/honnête homme est discret; il remarque les défauts d'autrui, mais il n'en parle jamais. (St. Evremond) I^es limites des sciences sont comme l'horizon; plus on en approche, plus elles reculent. (Mme. Necker) Quiconque est capable de mentir est indigne d'être compté au nom- bre des hommes. {Fénelon) En toute chose il faut considérer la fin. (La Fontaine) I/a moitié des humains vit aux dépens de l'autre. {Destouches) translation: The (real) gentleman is discreet; he observes the defects of others, but never alludes to them. The limits of science are like the horizon, the more we approach (them), the more they recede. Whoever is capable of falsehood is unworthy to be counted among (the number of) men. In everything we should consider the end. One half of mankind lives at the expense of the other. 228 Practical Frenxh Course TRENTE-QUATRIEME LEÇON, LESSON XXXIV. The Past Indefinite. i. The past indefinite is generally formed, in French, by combining the indicative present of the auxiliary avoir with the past participle of another verb. J'ai parlé. Il a fini. Elle a vendu. I have spoken. He has finished. She has sold. 2. The past indefinite is used to express an action ac- complished at a period of time entirely elapsed but not specified. J'ai aclirté an chapeau. j'ai reçu an télégramme. J'ai vu mon avocat. / have bought a hat. I hare received a telegram, I have seen m\ latover. 3. The past indefinite is also used, in French, to express an action done at a time a part of which is not yet elapsed, as : to-day, tliis week, this month, this year. Aujourd'hui j'ai beaucoup I I have studied a great deal to-day. étudié. Cette aencudne j'ai beaacoup / have studied a great deal this ctudié. week. Ce mois-ci j'ai perdu cent dollars, j / !>,. How mmli did you win } 10 What did I tell yon? 1 1. What «li.l he tell you ' 1:. what did she tell yon ' 13. What « 1 i- 1 they tell you? 1 j. What did you tell him ? 15. what
  • l you tell them 16. What have yon been doing? FRENCH CONSTRUCTION. i. Your brother, has he received my letter ? 2. Whom have you seen? 3. To whom have you spoken? .j. What have you said? ,S. What ha-, he answered ? h. What has she bought ? 7. Have yon played ? 8. How much have you lost? ', ii"\\ much have you won ? 10. What 1 to 1 you have I told? 1 I, \\ hat you has he told? 12. What you has she told ? 13. What you have they told? 14. What t< him have you told ? 15. What to them have you told? 10. What have yOU done? Practical French Course 233 17. Where did you go ? 18. Where did he go ? 19. Where did she go ? 20. Where did they go ? 21. When did you arrive ? 22. When did she arrive ? 23. When did he leave? 24. When did they leave ? 25. When did you return ? 26. Did you see your friend ? 27. Yes, I did. 28. When did you see him ? 29. I saw- him yesterday. 30. At what time did you see him ? 31. I saw him at 4 o'clock. 32. Did you speak to him ? 33. Yes, I did. 34. No, I did not. 35. Did you see your friends ?(m.) 36. Yes, I did. 37. When did you see them ? 38. I saw them last week ? 39 What day did you see them ? 40. I saw them on Tuesday. 41. Did you speak to them ? 1 7. Where are you gone ? 18. Where is he gone ? 19. Where is she gone? 20. Where are they gone ? 21. When are you arrived ? 22. When is she arrived ? 23. When is he departed ? 24. When are they departed ? 25. When are you returned ? 26. Have you seen your friend ? 27. Yes, I him have seen. 28. When him have you seen ? 29. I him have seen yesterday. 30. At what hour him have you seen? 31. I him have seen at 4 hours. 32. To him have you spoken ? 33. Yes, I to him have spoken. 34. No, I to him have not spoken. 35. Have you seen your friends ? 36. Yes, I them have seen. 37. When them have you seen ? 38. I them have seen the week past. 39. What day them have you seen ? 40. I them have seen Tuesday. 41. To them have you spoken? MEMORY EXERCISE. Il est plus glorieux de se vaincre soi-même que de vaincre les autres. (Scudery) Des choses de la terre ne valent pas qu'on s'y attache. {Nicholas) Da meilleure leçon est celle des exemples. (La Harpe) Translation: It is more glorious to conquer one's .self than to conquer others. The things of earth are unworthy of our attachment. The best lesson is that of example. 234 Tracticai. French Course TRENTE-CINQUIEME LEÇON, LESSON XXXV. The Past Definite. The past definite, which might also be called the his- torical or narrative tense, indicates an action accomplished at a time entirely elapsed. It cannot, therefore, be used in connection with the words to-day ', this mornings this week, this month, this year ; but it may be used in speak- ing of yesterday \ last ivcck, last month, last year. The pa^t definite is particularly used in narratives, but in ordinary conversation it is generally avoided as pedan- tic, and is always replaced by the past indefinite, as in the preceding lesson. The following exercise is an excellent illustration of the use of the definite or narrative past. Kii quelle ana e naquit r.eorge Washington ? Il naquit en i;u\ Bn quelle aimée mourut-il ? Il mourut en 1799. lui quelle aim. e naquit iléon I. ? Il naquit .1 m- l'Ile de Cone le is Km quelle anni e mourut-il ? Il mourut te 5 mai, On s,, "t Actuellement les n Napoléon premier? /// what year. rge Wash- ington bornt u born in 1732. In what year did he die t He died in /79c. In what year was Napoleon I. born in the island of Cor- . the 15th of August, /76c. :l year did / He iii'tt >»i the 3th of Mav, /Sj/. at present arc the \poleon the first f Practical French Course 235 Les restes de Napoléon I. furent ramenés en France en 1840, et déposés dans l'Hôtel des Inva- lides^*) à Paris, selon ses vœux: "Je désire que mes cendres re- posent sur les bords de la Seine, au milieu de ce peuple français que j'ai tant aimé." The remains of Napoleon I. were brought back to France in 1840 and placed in the Hotel des In- valides, in Paris, in compliance with his wishes: " / desire that my ashes repose on the banks of the Seine, among the French peo- ple whom I loved so mtich. ' ' Napoléon sortit sous-lieutenant de l'école militaire de Brienne en 1785. Il fut nommé capitaine, puis col- onel en 1793. Il reçut les epaulettes de général de brigade en 1794, après le fa- meux siège de Toulon où il se distingua. Le 5 octobre, 1795, il mitrailla les émeutiers devant l'église Saint- Roch, à Paris, et reçut le com- mandement en chef de l'armée d'Italie en 1796. Après de nombreuses et brillantes victoires, il conclut le traité de paix qui donnait à la France le Rhin pour limites en 1797. Après la campagne d'Egypte où il gagna la glorieuse victoire des pyramides, il retourna en France, renversa le Directoire le 5 novembre, 1799, et se fit nommer consul pour dix ans. Napoleon left the military school of Brienne as a Sub-Lieutenant in 1785. He was made a Captain, then a Colonel, in 1793. He was given the epaulets of a Brigadier-General in 1794, after the famous siege of Toulon, at which he distinguished himself On the 5th of October, 1795, he shelled the rioters in front of the Church of St. Rock, in Paris, and was made Commander-in-Chief of the " Armée d'Italie ' ' in 1796. After numerous and brilliant vic- tories, he concluded the treaty of peace which gave to France the Rhine as a boundary in 1797. After the Egyptian campaign, in which he won the glorious victory of the Pyramids, he returned to France, overthrew the Directory {Government) on the jth of Octo- ber, 1799, and caused himself to be made a Consul for 10 years. (*) A palatial shelter for old and invalid soldiers founded by Louis XIV. in 1674. 236 Practical French Course Il franchit le mont St. Bernard, gagna la bataille de Marengo, et signa la paix avec l'Autriche en 1801, et avec l'Angleterre en 1802. Nommé consul à vie, il rouvrit les églises que la révolution avait fermées et réorganisa toutes les branches de l'admin- istration. Proclamé empereur des Français le 18 mars 1804, il fut sacré en grande pompe le 2 décembre de la même année par le pape Pie VII., dans l'église Notre-Dame de Paris. Alors commença cette série de victoires qui jeta sur sou règne une si grande gloire, jusqu'à la treuse campagne de Russie en 1812. Bn 1813, l'Burope entière se coa- lisa contre le redoutable vain- queur <|ui abdiqua à Fontaine* bleau le i.» avril iM|, H reçut l'Ile d'Blbe en souveraineté. Le premier niais 1 s 1 5 , il reparut en Prance el régna e n core pen- dant cent jours, niais après la terrible bataille de Waterloo, le 18 juin, il Signa, en faveur de son fila, sa seconde abdication et réclama l'hospitalité de l'An- gleterre. He crossed the (Ml.) St. Bernard, won the battle of Marengo and signed the treaty of peace with Austria in 1801, and with Eng- land in 1802. Made Consul for life, he reopened the churches which had been closed by the Revolution and re- organized all the branches of the government. Proclaimed Emperor of the French on the 1 8th of March, 1804, he was crowned in great state on the 2d of December of the same year by Pope Pius VII, in the Church of Notre-Dame. Then began that series of victories which cast SO great a glory upon his reign, up to the disastrous campaign of Russia in 1812. In tS '/j, the whole of Europe formed a coalition against the formidable victor, -who abdicated al Fontainebleau on the /./t h of .April, 181 /, and was given the sovereignty (of > the Isle of Elba. On the 1st of March, 1815, he made his reappearance in France and reigned one hundred days, but after the tei > ible battle of Water- loo, on the 18th,qf June, ht signed his second abdication in favor of his son, and invoked the hospi- tality of Fug/and. Practical French Course 237 Le cabinet anglais le déclara pris- onnier et le rélégua à Sainte- Hélène, où il mourut le 5 mai 1821. (Bénard.) The English Parliament declared him a prisoner and deported him to St. Helena, where he died on the 5th of May, 182 1. EXERCISE FOR TRANSLATION. ENGLISH CONSTRUCTION. I. In what year did Napoleon the first leave the military school of Brienne ? 2. In what year was he given the shoulder-straps of a Briga- dier-General ? 3. Whom did he shell in front of the Church of St. Roch ? 4. What victory did he win in Egypt? 5. What mountain did he cross ? 6. What did he reopen ? 7. What did he reorganize ? 8. When was he proclaimed an Emperor ? 9. In what year did he abdicate ? 10. When did he reappear in France, and how long did he reign ? 11. After what battle did he sign his second abdication ? 12. In what year, and where did he die ? FRENCH CONSTRUCTION. In what year Napoleon first left he the school military of Brienne ? 2. In what year received he the epaulets of General of Bri- gade ? 3. Whom shelled he before the Church St. Roch ? 4. What victory won he in Egypt? 5. What mount crossed he? 6. What reopened he ? 7. What reorganized he ? 8. When was he proclaimed Fm- 9. In what year abdicated he ? 10. When reappeared he in France, and how much of time reigned he yet ? 11. After what battle signed he his second abdication ? 12. In what year, and where died he? 238 Practical French Course TRENTE-SIXIEME LEÇON. LESSON XXXVI. I. — The Future. The future is always used, in French, to express what shall be or will take place at a time not yet come. Therefore, the present tense, which is often used in Eng- lish after an adverb of time, such as when, as soon as, must be rendered in French by the future, whenever the adverb points out the relative time of a future action, state or condition. Thus, for example, I shall come when I am ready, I Bhall come a- booh as I can. must be translated : \ tendrai quand j<- serai prêt. Je viendrai dès que ji pourrai. Lit.: I shall come when I shall be ready. I shall come as soon as I shall be IMPORTANT REMARK. When the action depends on the will of the person, or has not yet been settled, tin- indicative of vouloir, to be willing i A- wis//, followed by an infinitive, must be em- ployed. Practical, French Course; 239 Où irez-vous ? Où voulez-vous aller ? J'irai à Paris. Je veux aller à Paris. Voulez-vous aller avec moi ? Voulez- vous m'accompagner? Voulez- vous venir ? Voulez-vous me dire quelle heure il est ? Voulez- vous me donner un verre d'eau ? Voulez-vous avoir la bonté de me donner un verre d'eau? Where will you go ? Where will you (do you wish to) go? I shall go to Paris. I wish to go to Paris. Will you go with me ? Will you accompany me? Will you come ? Will you tell me what time it is ? Will you give me a glass of water ? Will you have the kindness to give me a glass of water ? PRACTICE. Serez-vous chez vous demain ? Oui, je serai chez moi toute la journée. Votre frère sera-t-il chez lui ? Oui, il y sera. Votre tante sera-t-elle chez elle ? Non, elle n'y sera pas. Que ferez- vous aujourd'hui! J'étudierai ma leçon. Je prendrai un bain. Je ferai une promenade. Je ferai une ou deux visites. J'irai faire des emplettes. Qu'achèterez- vous ? J'achèterai un chapeau. Où irez-vous ce soir? Je resterai chez moi. J'aurai du monde. Nous aurons du monde. Will you be at home to-morrow Yes, I shall be at home all day long. Will your brother be at home? Yes, he will (be there). Will your aunt be at home ? No, she will not (be there). What will you do to-day ? I shall study my lesson. I shall take a bath. I shall take a walk. I shall make one or two visits. I shall go shopping. What will you buy ? I shall buy a hat. Where will you go this evening ? I shall stay at home. I will have company. We will have company. 240 Practical French Course Où irez-vous demain? J'irai à la campagne. A quelle heure partîrez-vous ? Je partirai à six heures du matin. A quelle heure retournerez-vous? Je retournerai à sept heures du soir. Quand irez-vous en Europe? J'irai le printemps prochain. Combien de temps resterez-vous à l'étranger? Environ deux mois. Quand viendrez-vous me voir? J'irai vous voir la semaine pro- chaine, sans faute. Vous serez le bienvenu. Vous serez la bienvenue. I. Je vous verrai demain. Where will you go to-morrow ? I shall go to the country. At what time will yon leave? I shall leave at six o'clock in the morn in g {or a.m.). At what time will you return ? I shall return at seven o'clock in the evening {or p.m.). When will you go to Europe ? I shall go next Spring. How long will you stay abroad? About t-wo months. When -will you come to see me? I shall go and see you next week, without fail. You will be welcome. You will be welcome. I will see you to-morrow. II.— The Conditional. The conditional present is used to express what would t;ikc place under a certain condition. Si j'avais assez d'argent, j'ache- If I had enough money I would buy terais cette maison. that house. The conditional past is used to denote what would have t.iken place if the condition on which it depended should have been fulfilled. Practical French Course 241 Si j'avais eu assez d'argent j'au- rais acheté cette maison. | Ifl had had enough money I would have bought that house. The verb following the conjunction si, if, cannot be used, as in English, in the future or the conditional. The future is replaced, in French, by the indicative pres- ent, and the conditional by the imperfect of the indicative. Thus, the sentences, If you will permit me I will come, If you would permit me I would come, If you would have permitted me, I would have come, must be translated : Si vous me le permettez je viendrai. Si vous me le permettiez je viendrais. Si vous me l'aviez permis je serais venu. If you permit me I shall come. If you permitted me I would come. If you had permitted me I would have come. When, however, the word si is used in the sense of whether, the future and conditional must be employed in both languages. Je ne sais s'il viendra ou non. Je ne savais s'il viendrait ou non. / do not know whether he will come or not. [come or not. I did not know whether he would PRACTICE. Si vous aviez assez d'argent achè- teriez- vous cette maison ? Oui, si j'avais assez d'argent je l'achèterais. If you had enough money would you buy that house ? Yes, if I had ??ioney enough I would buy it. 242 Practical French Course Si vous étiez à ma place que feriez-vous ? Si j'étais à votre place, voici ce que je ferais : J'irais passer un mois dans les montagnes ou au bord de la mer. S'il faisait beau temps sortiriez- vous ? Oui, si le temps était beau je sortirais. Où iriez- vous? J'irais faire une promenade dans le parc central. Si voua preniez one leçon chaque jour, vos progrès seraient beau- coup plus rapides ; vous parle- riez bientôt couramment et cor- rectement Oui, c'est vrai; si je prenais une leçon chaque jour je progres- serais beaucoup plus vite, mais je n'ai ni le temps ni l'argent Pourquoi ne venea-vous pas me voir plus souvent ? J'irais voua voir plus souvent si je le pouvais, niais je De le puis ; je Buis OCCUpé du matin au BOUT. Pourquoi n'amenex-voua • ami î Je serais très heureux de faire sa connaissance. If you were in my place what would you do ? If I were in y our place, this is what I icon I J do : I would go and spend a month in the mountains or at the seashore. If it were fine weather would you go out f Yes, if the weather were fine I would go out. Where would you go? I would [go and) take a walk ( entra/ Park. If you would take a lesson every dav. your progress would be much mote rapid; you would soon speak fluently and correctly , Yes, that is s<> ; if J took a lesson every day I would prog r ess much more rapidly, but I have neither the time nor the money. Why do you not come to see mt I would go and Si e y, // oftener if , but I cannot ; Jam busy fr,ity that you cannot come. 4.— THE SUBJUNCTIVE MUST BE USED After a relative pronoun preceded by a superlative or phrase having the force of a superlative, as le plus, the Practical Frknch Course; 247 most; le moins, the least; le meilleur, the best; le mieux, the best ; le pire, the worst ; le seul, the only. The subjunctive is also used after the following express- ions before a noun or pronoun : Il n'y a (or) il n'est There is no Il n'y a pas (or) il n'est pas There is not ...... Il n'y a que (or) il n'est que There is only Examples La plus jolie femme que j'aie ja- mais vue de ma vie. I,a seule chose que vous ayez à faire. C'est le mieux que vous puissiez faire. C'est le meilleur que nous ayons. Il n'y a personne qui puisse le faire. Il n'est rien qui soit comparable à cela. Il n'y a pas de méthode qui soit plus facile. Il n'y a que mon frère qui puisse parler anglais chez nous. C'est le plus beau monument que j'aie jamais vu. C'est le seul jour où je puisse y aller. The prettiest woman I ever saw in my life. The only thing you have to do. It is the best that you can do. It is the very best zve have. There is no one who can do it. There is nothing which can be compared with that. There is no easier method. There is only my brother speak English at home. It is the most beautiful monument that I have ever seen. It is the only day that I can go there. 248 Practical, French Course 5.— THE SUBJUNCTIVE MUST BE USED After the following conjunctive expressions : Avant que. Afin que. Pour que. Pourvu que. Bien que (or) quoique. En cas que. Sans que. Supposé que. Soit que. Quel que. Qui que. Quoi que. Quelque chose que. Jusqu'à ce que (or) que. Examples Avant qu'il vienne. Afin qu'elle vienne. Pourvu qu'il ne pleuve pas. Jusqu'à ce que je vienne. Attendez qu'il vienne. Soit quelle vienne ou non. i'.n ras qu'il pleuve. Qui que ce soit. Quoi que ce soit. Quel que soit le prix. Quelque bons amis qu'ils soient. Before he comes. In order tluit she may come. Provided it Joes not rain. Until I conic. Wait till he comes. Whether she comes or not. In case it rains. Whoever it may PC II 'hatcver it may be. Whatever mar be the price. However good friends they be. PRESENT AND IMPERFECT OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. The tense of the subjunctive mood is determined by the tense of the preceding verb, according to the following rules : 1. -Till- PRESENT OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE IS REQUIRED After the present and future tenses of the indicative mood. 11 faut que j'aille chez moi. [] faudra que j'aille à Boston. Je ne pense pas que ce soit possible. I 'must go home. I shall have to go to Boston. I do not think it is possible. Practical French Course 249 2.— THE IMPERFECT OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE IS REQUIRED After the past tenses of the indicative and after the con- ditional. Je ne savais pas qu'il fût marié. Je ne pensais pas qu'elle eût des enfants. Je voudrais que vous vinssiez. / did not know he was married. I did not think she had children. I should like you to come. OBSERVATION. In conversation the imperfect of the subjunctive is gen- erally replaced by the present, the imperfect of the indica- tive, or by the conditional. This change has been re- cently authorized by an official decision of the French Minister of Public Instruction. PRACTICE. PRESENT OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. Que voulez- vous que je fasse ? Que voulez- vous qu'il fasse ? Que voulez- vous que nous fassions? Que voulez- vous qu'ils fassent ? Je ne pense pas qu'il soit marié. Je ne pense pas qu'elle ait des enfants. Je ne crois pas que ce soit possible. Je ne crois pas que vous puissiez le faire. Je ne crois pas qu'il vienne. IMPERFECT OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. Que vouliez- vous que je fisse? Que vouliez-vous qu'il fît ? Que " " que nous fissions ? Que vouliez-vous qu'ils fissent ? Je ne pensais pas qu'il fût (ou était) marié. Je ne pensais pas qu'elle eût des enfants. Je ne croyais pas que ce fût possible. Je ne croyais pas que vous pussiez (ou pourriez) le faire. Je ne croyais pas qu'il vînt (ou viendrait). 250 Practical French Course Pensez-vous qu'il vienne? Croyez-vous que ce soit possible J'ai peur qu'il ne soit malade. Je crains qu'elle ne soit malade. Il est temps que je parte. Il est temps qu'il parte. Il est temps que vous partiez. C'est le mieux que vous puissiez faire. C'est le mieux qu'il puisse faire. Je regrette que vous ne puissiez pas venir. Pensiez-vous qu'il vînt ( ou viendrait) ? Croyiez-vous que ce fût possible ? J'avais peur qu'il ne fût malade. Je craignais qu'elle ne fût malade. Il était temps que je partisse (ou parte). Il était temps qu'il partit. Il était temps que vous partissiez. C'était le mieux que vous pussiez faire. C'était le mieux qu'il pût faire. Je regretterais que vous ne pus= siez pas venir. EXERCISE FOR TRANSLATION. ENGLISH CONSTRICTION. i. Where do you want me to go? 2. When <1" you want me t-> come? 3. What d"u wish me t<> sing ? 5. What do you wish him to do? 6. Where yon want him l<> go? 7. When do yon want her to come ? s. When do you wish us to come? 9, What '1" you want me ; 10. I want you t'> Bpeak French. I 1. I want you to Study. FRENCH CONSTRUCTION. i. Where will you that I may go? 2. When will you that I may come ? 3. What will you that I may take? 4. What wish you that I may SÎllg? 5. What wish you that he may do? 6. Where will you that he may 7. Whin will you that .she may come ? 8. When wish you that we may come ? 9. What will you that I may |n.ik French. 11. I will that you may study. Practical, French Course 251 12. I want you to sing. 13. I want you to tell me the truth. 14. Do you think he will come ? 15. Do you think he will go to Paris? 16. Do you think she will come ? 17. I do not think she is rich. 18. I do not believe he is in New York. 19. I do not think she can speak French ? 20. I did not think that he was so rich. 21. I did not think she was married. 12. I will that you may sing. 13. I will that you me may say la vérité. 14. Think you that he may come ? 15. Think you that he may go to Paris ? 16. Think you that she may come? 17. I think not that she may be rich. 18. I believe not that he may be at New York. 19. I think not that she may be able to speak French. 20. I thought not that he might be so rich. 21. I thought not that she might be married. OBSERVATION. The subjunctive mood being of very great importance in French, the pupil should study the above lesson most at- tentively and familiarize himself thoroughly with the same. MEMORY EXERCISE. Il vaut mieux hasarder de sauver un coupable que de condamner un innocent. ( Voltaire) Tous nos jours vont à la mort, le dernier y arrive. {IMontaigne) De remède est parfois pire que le mal. (Letioble) translation: It is better to risk sparing a guilty person than to condemn an inno- cent one. All our days travel towards death, the last one arrives at (reaches) it. The remedy is at times worse than the evil. 252 Practical French Course TRENTE-HUITIEME LEÇON. LESSON XXXVIII. The Imperative Mood. The imperative is employed to express command, ex- hortation, permission, prayer or entreaty. HOW TO FORM THE IMPERATIVE. I. The second person singular of the imperative is always the same as the first person singular of the indica- tive present, minus the personal pronoun je. Je parle, / speak. Je finis, I finish. Je vends, / sell. Je viens, / come. Parle, Speak thou. Finis, finish thou. Vends, sell thou. Viens, come thou. 2. The first and second persons plural of the imperative are similar to the same persons of the indicative present, minus the personal pronouns nous and vous. Nous parlons, wespeak. Nous allons, Nous partons, we depart. Nuib binons, D i drink. Parlons, let us \peak. Allons, let US go. Partons, let us depart. Buvons, Id us drink. Vous parlez, you speak. Tariez, speak ye or you Vous allez, Allez, Vous buvez, \ ou drink. Buvez, drink l Practical French Coursic 253 EXCEPTIONS. The verbs être, to be; avoir, to have ; aller, to go; pouvoir, to be able i and vouloir, to be willing, make in the imperative : Aie, have t/iou. Sois, be thou. Soyez, be ye or you. Soyons, let us be. Ayez, have ye ox you. Ayons, let us have. Va, go thou. Veuillez, be willing {kindly). Puissiez- vous may you 3. The English forms let him, let her, let them, are ren- dered in French by the third person singular or plural of the subjunctive present. Let him be. Qu'il soit. Thai he may be. Let her be. Qu'elle soit. That she may be. Let them be. Qu'ils soient. That they may be. Let him go. Qu'il aille. That he may go. Let them go. Qu'ils aillent. That they may go. Let him come. Qu'il vienne. That he may come. Let them come. Qu'ils viennent. That they may come. 4. In the imperative the pronoun or pronouns are placed after the verb when the sentence is affirmative, and before the verb when the sentence is negative. Examples : Parlez-moi. Parlez-nous. Parlez-lui. Parlez-leur. Dites-le-moi. Dites-le-nous. Dites-le-lui. Dites-le-leur. Ne me parlez pas. Ne nous parlez pas. Ne lui parlez pas. Ne leur parlez pas. Ne me le dites pas. Ne nous le dites pas. Ne le lui dites pas. Ne le leur dites pas. 254 Practical French Course PRACTICE. Que voulez-vous que je fasse? Faites ce que vous voudrez. Mettez le couvert. Mettez la table. Otez le couvert. Balayez le salon. Lavez le plancher et les escaliers. Lavez la vaisselle. Essuyez la vaisselle. Epoussetez les meubles. Allumez le feu. ssez ma chemise. Etudiez votre leçon. Portez cette lettre à la poste. Que voulez-vous qu'il fat Qu'il fasse ce qu'il voudi Qu'il étudie sa leçon. Que voulez-vous qu'elle l Qu'elle fasse ce qu'elle voudra. Qu'elle l'uni: Qiu- voulez-vous qu'ils fassent - Qu'ils fassent ce qu'ils voudront Qu'ils étudient Qu'ils lisent. Quand voules-vous que je vienne? Venez quand vous voudrez. Venez quand îx.n vous fera plaisir. Quand voulez- voua qu'il vit-nue? Qu'il vienne quand il voudra. Qu'il vienne quand l»'ii lui fera plaisir. What do you want me to do? Do -what you please. Lay the table-cloth. Set the table. Clear the table. Sweep the parlor. Wash the floor and stairs. II ash the dishes. Jl 'ipe (or dry) the dishes. Dust the furniture. Kindle tin- fire. Iron my shirt Study your lesson. Go and mau this letter. What do you want him to dof Let him do what he pleases. Let him study his lesson. What do you want her to Let her do what she pleases. Let her study her les\ou. What do you :eant them to do ? Let them do what they will. I et them study. Let them read. When do you -wish me to come t ( ome when you ui'tl. when you please. When do you wish him to eome ' Let him eome when he 'will. Let him eome when he pi< Jesire is understood, Quand désirez-vous qu'ils viennent ? Qu'ils viennent quand ils voudront. Qu'ils viennent quand bon leur fera plaisir. Practical French Course 255 When do you wish them to come ? Let them come when they will. Let the ui come when they please. Où désirez-vous que j'aille? Allez où vous voudrez. Where do you wish me to go ? Go where you please. Où désirez-vous qu'il aille? Qu'il aille où il voudra. Où désirez- vous qu'ils aillent ? Qu'ils aillent où ils voudront. Que voulez-vous que nous fassions ? Fumons un cigare. Chantons une chanson. Buvons un coup. Jouons aux cartes. Dansons. Amusons-nous. Allons au théâtre. Where do you wish him to go? Let him go where he will. Where do yoti wish them togof Let them go where they will. What will you have us do ? Let us smoke a cigar. Let us sing a song. Let us have a drink. Let us play cards. Let us dance. Let us enjoy ourselves. Let us go to the theatre. EXERCISE FOR TRANSLATION. ENGLISH CONSTRUCTION. i. What do you want him to study ? 2. Let him study his lesson. 3. What do you want her to buy ? 4. Let her buy a theatre ticket. 5. Where do you want him to go ? 6. Let him go to Boston. FRENCH CONSTRUCTION. i. What will you that he may study ? 2. That he may study his lesson. 3. What will you that she may buy? 4. That she may buy a " billet de théâtre. ' ' 5. Where will you that he may go ? 6. That he may go to Boston. 256 Practical French Course 7. When do you want her to come ? 8. Let her come to-morrow. 9. What do you wish her to do ? 10. Let her wash the floor. 1 1 . What do you wish them to sing? 12. Let them sing a song. 7. When will you that she may come? 8. That she may come to-morrow. 9. What wish you that she may do? 10. That she may wash the floor ? 11. What wish you that they may sing? 12. That they may sing a song. 13. What do you wish them to do ? 13. What wish you that they may do? 14. Let them dance. I 14. That they may dance. MEMORY EXERCISE. Il est plus aisé d'être sage pour les autres que pour soi-même. (/.«• Rochefoucauld) Le moment du péril est celui du courage. (/.<* Harpe) Jamais noua ne goûtons de parfaite allégresse. (( omeille) Le monde est nne figure trompeuse qui passe. [Buffon) L'harmonie la plus douce est la voix de celle que l'on aime. {La Bruyère) Les meilleures harangues sont celles que le cœur a dictées. (Marmontel) L'arbrisseau le plus sain a besoin de culture. [Fabre // ought to have brought your book. Vous auriez dû amener votre ami. You should have brought your Y. mis n'auriez pas dû l'oublier. n'auriez pas dû y aller. N'aimeriez- vous pea avoir un une automobile ' Si, je l'aimerais beaucoup. Saves-voua conduû s.iviv-voiis montera cheval ? Saves-voua aller à bicyclette C<- c'est pas à croire. Cela n'est pas à faire. Que c'est cher ! Que c'est loin ! Qu'il fait chaud ' Pensez-vus pouvoir y aller? Je pense pouvoir y aller. friend. You should not have forgotten it. }'ou should not have gone there. Would you not like to hav, an automobile t Yes, I should like it very much. Do you know how to drive t Do you know how to ride on horsebth 1 1 fh> you know how to ride a bicycle? It is not to be believed. That is not to be done. How dear it is ! It is so fart) It Ù SO warm ! Do you think you can go there/ /think I can go theie. Practical French Course 263 EXERCISE FOR TRANSLATION. ENGLISH CONSTRUCTION. i. You should study the verbs. 2. You should take exercise. 3. He should take more exercise. 4. She should take three lessons a week. 5. She may come. 6. They may come. 7. I may go to Paris. 8. I may return sooner. 9. How beautiful it is ! 10. How dear it is ! 11. How kind you are ! 12. How pretty she is ! 13. How pretty you are ! 14. I wish I were in your place. 15. I wish I could go to Paris. 16. I wish I had a million dollars. 17. Do you know how to dance ? 18. Do you know how to sing ? 19. Do you know how to play cards? 20. Do you know how to do it ? FRENCH CONSTRUCTION. 1. You ought to study the verbs. 2. You ought to make some exercise. 3. He ought to make more of exercise. 4. She ought to take three lessons per week. 5. It is possible that she may come. 6. It is possible that they may come. 7. It is possible that I may go to Paris. 8. It is possible that I may return more soon. 9. How it is beautiful ! 10. How it is dear ! 11. How you are amiable ! 12. How she is pretty ! 13. How you are pretty ! 14. I should like to be at your place. 15. I should like to be able to go to Paris. 16. I should like to have one million of dollars. 17. Know you to dance ? 18. Know you to sing ? 19. Know you to play at the cards ? 20. Know you it to do ? 264 Practical French Course QUARANTIEME LEÇON, LESSON XL. PRACTICAL EXERCISE ON SOME IMPORTANT VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. AIMER, to love, to like. The verb aimer, followed by an infinitive, generally re- quires the preposition à, but aimer mieux, to like better, takes no preposition. M 'aimez- vous? Oui, je vous aime. M'aimes-tu? Oui, je t'aime. Je l'aime beaucoup. Je les aime beaucoup. Je ne l'aime pas. Je De l'aime Je ne les aime pas. Do you love nie f Yes, I lore \ou. Dost thou love met Yes. l love tarn very fond of U. I am very fond of them, I do not like him or her. I do mot like it. I do not like them. j'aime à mooter A cheval. J'aime mieux aller en voiture. Vous ne m'aimez pu 1 Mais si, je vous aime. Qui m'aime bien aime mon cbien. on korsebaek I like better to d> i You d(> not like met I do. • •''•' my it'g. Practical French Course TROUVER, to find, to like. 265 The verb to like, preceded by the adverb how, is trans- lated in French by trouver. Où avez-vous trouvé cela ? Je l'ai trouvé dans la rue. Comment trouvez-vous ce vin ? Je le trouve un peu aigre. Comment trouvez-vous ces raisins ? Je les trouve un peu surs. Comment avez-vous trouvé Paris ? Je l'ai trouvé très beau. Un enfant trouvé. Where did you find that ? I found it on the street. How do you like {find) this wine ? I find it a little sour. How do you like {find) these grapes ? I find them a little sour (green) . How did you like {find) Paris? I found it very beautiful. A foundling. FELICITER, to congratulate. Permettez-moi de vous féliciter. Je vous félicite. Je vous félicite de votre belle voix. Je vous félicite de vos progrès en français. Je vous fais mes compliments bien sincères. Je vous adresse mes plus sincères félicitations. Allow me to congratulate you. I congratulate you. I congratulate you on your beauti- ful voice. I congratulate you on your progress in French. I compliment you very sincerely. I tender you my most sincere congratulations. PENSER à, to think of. In its usual meaning, the verb penser requires the pre- position à before the object, but if it signifies to have an 266 Practical French Course opinion about someone or something it takes the prepo- sition de. A qui pensez-vous? Je pense à mon ami. A quoi pensez- vous ? A rien. Pensez à moi. Avez- vous pensé à moi ? Oui, j'ai pensé à vous. Pensez-y. J'y penserai. Y avez-vous pensé ? J'y ai pensé. Je n'y ai pas pensé. N'y pensez plus. Je n'y pense plus. One pensez-vous ,1e moi ? Je pense «pie vous ltd tri-s aimable. Pensez à votre avenir. one bonne | ■ Of whom, do you think ? I think of my friend. What air you thinking off Of nothing. Think of me. Did you think of me ? Yes, I hare thought of you. Think of it ; think it over. I will think of it. Did you think of it? I have thought of it. I have not thought of it. Do not think of it any more. I do not think of it any more. What do you think of me .' I think \that) you are very kind. Think of your future. That ù a good thought. IDIOMATIC EXPRESSIONS. Penser mal Penser bout haut. C'est ma manière de penser. A ce que je pense. rendant que j'y Dense. penser. To think wrong. To think aloud. Tfuit is my way of thinking. 7b my mind; in m v opinion. : think. fit. ( 'nintentionillv. Practical French Course PASSER, to pass, to spend (time), to call upon. 267 Laissez-moi passer. Voulez-vous me passer cela i Vous ne pouvez pas passer par là ; ; par ici. Où avez- vous passé la soirée ? Je l'ai passée chez madame N. Voulez-vous passer chez moi ? Voulez-vous avoir la bonté de passer chez moi ? Veuillez passer chez moi. Je passerai chez vous demain. Avez- vous passé chez le docteur? Oui, j'ai passé chez lui, mais il n'y était pas. Let me pass. Will you hand me that ? You cannot go that way ; go this way. Where did you spend the evening ? I spent it at Mrs. N's. Will you call at my house ? Will you have the kindness to call on me ? Kindly call on me. I will call on you to-morrow. Did you call upon the doctor f Yes, I called on him, but he was not at home. IDIOMATIC EXPRESSIONS. Cette fleur est passée. Mes beaux jours sont passés. Cela m'a passé de l'esprit. Il a été passé par les armes. Il a été passé au fil de l'épée. J'ai passé par de rudes épreuves. Cela me passe. Passez votre chemin. Passez par dessus ce mur. C'est passé de mode. That flower is faded. My best days are over. That has slipped my memory. He was shot militarily. He was put to sword. I have gone through severe trials. That is beyond my comprehension. Pass on ; go your way. Pass over this wall. It is now out of fashion DEMANDER, to ask for, to wish, to want. DEMANDER à, to ask from or of. Que demandez- vous ? Je ne demande rien. What do you warn ? Nothing. 268 Practical French Course Qui demandez-vous ? Je demande le caissier. Je demande le teneur de livres. Je demande le concierge. Je demande la concierge. Qu'est-ce qu'il demande? Il demande de l'eau chaude. A qui faut-il que je demande la permission ? Demandez-la au maire. Whom do yon want? I want the cashier. I want the book-keeper. I want the janitor. I want the ja nitre ss. What does he want f He leant s some hot -water. From ;c/io»i must I ask permission f From the Mayor. IDIOMATIC EXPRESSIONS. Cela demande du temps et de la patience. Cela demande une explication. Il demande L'aumône. On vous demande. On demande une femme de chambre. on demande un commis sachant bien le français. Je ne demande pas mieux. That requires time and patience . That requires an explanation. He seeks alms (charity). )'ou are wanted. A chamber-maid is wanted. .7 clerk familiar with French is -wanted. [ ask for nothing better. CHERCHER, to look fo> , to search. Que cherchez-vous? Je cherche mes ganta Que cherche til } Qu'est-ce qu'il cherche ? Il cherche ton canut. Allez me chercher un marteau. Allez me chercher un clou. Allez me chercher un tourne-vis. What aie you looking for f I am looking for my gloves. What is he looking for f What is he looking for ? He is looking for his note-book. (,'<> and bring me a hammer. Co and bring me a nail. •driver. Practical French Course 269 IDIOMATIC Allez chercher un médecin. Envoyez chercher le docteur. Il cherche noise à tout le monde {or) Il cherche querelle à tout le monde. Il cherche midi à quatorze heures. Cherchez la femme ! EXPRESSIONS. Go for a physician. Send for the doctor. He tries to pick tip a quarrel with everybody. He tries to pick up a quarrel îoith everybody. He looks for difficulties where there are none. Find the woman ! EXERCISE FOR TRANSLATION. ENGLISH CONSTRUCTION. Do you like wine ? Do you like beer ? Do you like flowers ? What do you like better ? 5. Did you find your gloves ? 6. Where did you find them ? 7. How do you like New York ? 8. How did you like Paris ? 9. I congratulate him. 10. I shall congratulate her. 11. I have congratulated them. 12. Give him my compliments. 13. I think of you all the time. 14. I have thought of you. 15. Do you think of me ? 16. I will think of you. 17. Whom is he asking for? 18. Ask of the janitor. 19. He is wanted. 20. Boy wanted. 21. What is she looking for ? FRENCH CONSTRUCTION. Like you the wine? (m.) Like you the beer? (f.) Like you the flowers ? What like you better ? 5. Have you found your gloves ? 6. Where them have you found ? 7. How find you New York ? 8. How have you found Paris ? 9. I him congratulate. 10. I her shall congratulate. 11. I them have congratulated. 12. Make to him my complimentSo 13. I think to you all the time. 14. I have thought to you. 15. Think you to me ? 16. I will think to you. 17. Whom demands he ? 18. Ask to the janitor. 19. One him demands. 20. One demands a boy. 21. What searches she? 270 Practical French Course QUARANTE ET UNIEME LEÇON. LESSON XLI PRACTICAL EXERCISE ON SOME IMPORTANT VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. QUITTER, to leave, to quit. The verb quitter is used in reference to persons and places and sometimes to things in the sense of to abandon, to give up, to remove. Elle a quitté son mari. Elle a quitte sa maison. Il a quitté le commerce. Il a quitté la partie Quittez vos souliers. She has left her husband. She has left her house. He has abandoned business. He g axe up the game. Take off your shoes. LAISSER, to leave, to let. The verb laisser is generally said of things. It is, how- ever, sometimes used in reference to persons in the sense of to allow, to let. ( >ù c-st rotre livre ? Je l'ai laissé a l'école Laissez-moi tranquille Laissez-le tranquille Laissez cria tranquille. // here is your book f I left it at school. leave me alone. Leave him alone. Leave that alone. Practical French Course IDIOMATIC EXPRESSIONS. 271 Laissez-moi faire. C'est à prendre ou à laisser. Vous avez laissé tomber quelque chose. Il laisse tout à l'abandon. Elle laisse tout traîner. Leave it to me. Take it or leave it. You have dropped something. He leaves everything in disorder. She lets everything lie about in disorder. DESIRER, to desire, to wish. Que désirez-vous ? Je désire vous parler. Je ne désire rien. Je ne désire plus rien. J'ai tout ce que je désire. What do you wish ? I desire to speak to you. I desire nothing. I desire nothing more. I have all I desire. SOUHAITER, to wish. Je vous souhaite le bonjour. Je vous souhaite une bonne nuit. Je vous souhaite un bon voyage. Je vous souhaite une bonne année. Je vous souhaite un joyeux Noël. / bid you good day. I bid you good night. I wish you a pleasant trip. I wish you a happy new year. I wish you a merry Christmas. PORTER and MENER, to carry, to take to a place. APPORTER and AMENER, to bring. EflPORTER and EHHENER, to take away The verbs porter, apporter and emporter are used for things (except carriages.) 272 Practical 1 1 knch Course The verbs mener, amener and emmener are used for per- sons and animals. The verb porter is also used in the sense of to wear, to have on (clothes.) Portez cette lettre à la poste. flenez cet enfant à l'école. Apportez votre cahier. Amenez votre ami. Emportez ce livre. Emmenez votre chien. Amenez-moi une voiture décou- verte. Amenez-nous une voiture fermée. Cela porte bonheur. Cela porte malheur. Où mène ce chemin ? Où mène ce sentie r ? Take this letter to the post-office. Take that child to school. Bring your copy-book. Bring your friend. Take that book away. Take your dog away. Bring me an open carriage. Bring us a closed carriage. That brings good luck. That brings bad luck. Where does this road lead to f li 'here does this path lead to f The wind has blown my h^t off. Love o/'li n gets the better of reason. Le vent a emporté mon chapeau. L'amour l'emporte souvent sur la r.iis.,11. Cette considération l'emporte sur That consideration outweighs every Umtefl les autres. other. LEVER, to lift up, to raise. SOULEVER," to lift up, to stir up. ELEVER, to raist, to erect, to brine i*p. ENLEVER, to carry off, to remove. Levez la main droite. Soulevez ce paquet. Raise your right hand. Lift up this package. Practicai, French Coursk 273 Cet enfant est bien élevé. Ce garçon est mal élevé. Enlevez cela de dessus la table. Voyez si vous pouvez enlever cette tache. That child is well-bred. That boy is ill-bred. Take that off the table. See if you can remove this stain. VERSER, to pour, to shed. RENVERSER, to upset, to spill. BOULEVERSER, to upset, to unsettle. Versez-moi à boire. J'ai versé bien des larmes. J'ai renversé la cafetière. J'ai renversé la théière. J'ai renversé la soupière. J'ai renversé le sucrier. J'ai renversé le saladier. J'ai renversé la salière. Il a été renversé par une voiture. Il est tombé à la renverse. Nous sommes en train de démé- nager. Tout est bouleversé. Tout est sens dessus dessous. Pour me something to drink. I have shed many tears. I have upset the coffee-pot. I have upset the tea-pot. I have upset the soup-tureen. I have upset the sugar-bowl. I have upset the salad-bowl. I have upset the salt-cellar. He was thrown down by a carriage. He fell backwards. We are moving our furniture. Everything is upset. Everything is upside down. ÔTER, to take off, to remove. Otez votre pardessus. Otez ça de là. Otez- vous du chemin. Take off your coat. Take that away from there. Stand out of the way. 274 Practical French Course TRAVAILLER, to work. Je travaille du matin au soir. Vous travaillez trop. Ne travaillez pas tant. / work from morning to night. You work too much. Do not work so much. Il faut que je travaille pour gagner I have to work to earn my living. ma vie. PESER, to weigh. Combien pesez-vous ? Je pèse cent cinquante livres. C'est un bon poids. Voulez-vous peser cette lettre Elle fait plus que le poids. How much do you weigh ? I weigh one hundred and fifty pounds. That is a good weight. Will you please weigh this letter? It is over-weight. LOUER, to prone, to rent. Elle a été très louée. Elle aime les louanges. Maison à louer. Appartement meublé à louer. Chambre garnie à louer. She was very much praised. She likes praise. House to let. Furnished apartment to let. Furnished room to let. EflPECHER, to hinder, to prevent. Vous m'empêchez de travailler. Il m'a empêché «le sortir. Je ne vous empêche pas «l'y aller. Je ne puis l'empêcher. L'un n'empêche pas l'autre. You hinder me from working. He //. Where do you v 11. I)i«l you work yestcrdax ? 12. How much does your brother weigh ? 13. How much does he weigh? 14. How much does ahe weigh ? 15. [fl this house to let ? [6. Have you furnished rooms to let ? 17. He haa prev en ted me from go- ing out. iS. I hope to »ee him soon. iy. Who broke this glass ? ho broke that chair ? FRENCH CONSTRUCTION. i. Why has she left her house ? 2. Where have you left your um- brella? 3. What wishes he ? 4. Why have you not brought vour book? 5. Why have you not brought your friend ? 6. Raise the head. 7. Can you to raise this trunk? 8. What lias she upset ? y. Why remove you not your coat ? to. Where work you ? 1 1. Have you worked yesterday ? 12. How much weighs your bro- ther ? 1 v How much weighs he? 14. How much weighs she? 15. This house is she to let? 16. Have you some rooms furnished to let ? 17. Heme has prevented from to go out. [8. I hope him to see soon. iy. Who ha>> broken this glass ? 20. Who has broken that chair? Practical French Course; 277 QUARANTE-DEUXIEME LEÇON. LESSON XLII PRACTICAL EXERCISE ON SOME IMPORTANT VERBS OF THE EIRST CONJUGATION. PRESENTER, to present, to introduce. Permit me to present yoti Mr. X. Permettez-moi de vous présenter monsieur X. J'ai l'honneur de vous présenter madame X. Présentez-moi à votre ami. Présentez-moi à lui. Présentez-lui mes respects. I have the honor of presenting you Mrs. X. Introduce me to your friend. Introduce me to him. Give him or her my regards. JOUER, to play. Il joue bien ; c'est un bon acteur. Elle joue fort bien ; c'est une bonne actrice. Voulez- vous jouer aux cartes ? A qui est-ce à jouer? C'est à vous à jouer. He plays well; he is a good actor. She plays very well ; she is a good actress. Will you play cards ? Whose turn is it to play ? It is your turn to play. IDIOMATIC EXPRESSIONS. Touchez- vous du piano ? Je joue de la mandoline. Il pince de la guitare. Jouons aux dés. Jouez-nous un air. Il m'a joué un tour. Il joue à la hausse. Il joue à la baisse. Il m'a joué. Do you play the piano ? I play the mandoline. He plays the guitar. Let us throw dice. Play us a tune. He played me a trick. He is a bull. {Broker's term.) He is a bear. " " He has deceived me. 278 Practical French Course VOLER, to steal, to rob, to fly. Il vole ses clients ; c'est un voleur. Elle a volé une bague ; c'est une voleuse. Cet oiseau est blessé ; il ne peut pas voler. Le temps passe bien vite. I.e temps vole. Vous ne l'avez pas volé ! idiom Il ne l'a pas volé ! He robs his customers ; he is a thief. She stole a ring ; she is a thief. That bird is wounded ; it cannot fly. Time passes very quickly. Time flies. You deserve it richly ! He deserves it richly ! DERANGER, to disturb. Kst-ce que je vous dérange ? Vous ne me dérangez nullement. Je suis fâche' de » tus déranger. Je suis fâche <>u pay mm? 2. I shall pay him tomorrow. 3. Did he give you a receipt ? 4. Did you try on your s ' 5. Why «li'l you close the dooi ? 6. Why us y attendre. Il fallait s'y attendre. Je m'y attendais. )'.>// keep people waiting. He always keeps people waiting. YOU can ex peel it. It was t,< be expected. / expected that. ENTENDRE, to hear. ENTENDRI- DIRE r OUÏR DIRE, to hear something said. ENTENDRI! PARLER, to hear Spoken of. RECEVOIR DES NOUVELLES, to hear from. Practical French Course *7 M 'en tendez- vous ? Je vous entends. Ne m'avez-vous pas entendu ? Je vous ai entendu. J'ai entendu dire qu'il est mort. Je l'ai entendu dire, or Je l'ai ouï dire. Je le sais par ouï=dire. J'ai entendu parler de lui. J'en ai entendu parler. Avez-vous reçu des nouvelles de Mr. X. ? J'ai reçu de ses nouvelles ce matin. Do you. hear me ? I hear you. Did you not hear me ? I heard you. I have heard he is dead. I heard it said. I heard it said. I know it by hearsay. I have heard of him. I have heard of it. Have you heard from Mr. X. ? I heard from him this morning. IDIOMATIC EXPRESSIONS. Je vous entends. Il n'entend pas raison. Il n'entend pas raillerie. Vous n'y entendez rien. Il n'y entend rien. Entendons-nous. Qu'entendez- vous par là ? C'est entendu. On ne s'entend pas. Je m'entends. Il s'y entend. Cela s'entend. Il est très entendu. / understand you. He does not listen to reason. He cannot take a joke. You know nothing about it. He knows nothing about it. Let us come to an understanding. What do you ?nean by that ? That is understood ; agreed ! One cannot hear another speak. I know what I mean. He is an expert. Of course ; as a matter of course. He is very skillful in his prof ession {medical). Practical French Course REPONDRE, to ayiswer. Répondez-moi. Pourquoi ne répondez-vous pas Qu'avez-vous répondu? Je n'ai rien répondu. Je réponds de lui. J'en réponds. Je m'empresse de répondre à votre aimable lettre du 3 courant. Answer me. Why do you not answer? What did y oti answer? I answered nothing. I answer for him. I answer for it. I hasten to answer you/ A ind letter of the 3d instant. DEFENDRE, to forbid, to prohibit, to defend. < >n me défend de sortir. On me l'a défendu. Le médecin m'a défendu de famer. Défense de fumer 1 id. ) Défendez-moi. Je vous défendrai. / am forbidden to go out. I have been forbidden. The physician forbade me tostnoke. No smoking allowed. Defend me. I shall defend you. EXERCISE FOR TRANSLATION BNGUSH 1 ONSTRUCTION. 1KKNCH O'NSTKICTION. 1. Which one 'li'l y<>u 1 is 2. Which ones «li'l he c! V You are blushing. .(. she blnahed. 5. He is growing tall. 6. She is getting thin. 7. That girl obeys her parents. 1. Which have yon chosen ? 2. Which h.is lie chosen ? 3. Yon blush. .j. She has blushed. 5. He grow* tall . 6. She gets thin. 7. That girl ol>e\s to her parents. Practical French Course 289 8. That boy disobeys his parents. 9. I shall punish you. 10. Did you punish hirn ? 11. Did he succeed ? 12. I hope he will succeed. 13. He enjoys good health. 14. Did you expect us ? 15. Why did you not wait ? 16. I cannot wait any longer. 17. What did she answer ? 18. I shall defend you. 19. Why did you not defend me ? 20. I was forbidden... 21. Did you answer? 22. Will you answer him ? 23. Do not answer him. 24. How long did you wait ? 25. Can you wait ? 26. I cannot wait. 27. Has your brother recovered ? 28. He has recovered. 29. Who cured him ? 30. Doctor X. cured him. 8. That boy disobeys to his pa- rents. 9. I you shall punish. 10. Him have you punished ? 11. Has he succeeded ? 12. I hope that he will succeed. 13. He enjoys of a good health. 14. Us have you expected ? 15. Why have you not waited ? 16. I cannot to wait more long time. 17. What has she answered ? 18. I you shall defend. 19. Why me have you not defen- ded? 20. One me has forbidden... 21. Have you answered ? 22. To him will answer you ? 23. To him answer not. 24. How much of time have you waited ? 25. Can you to wait ? 26. I cannot to wait. 27. Your brother is he cured? 28. He is cured. 29. Who him has cured ? 30. The doctor X. him has cured. MEMORY EXERCISE. Nul n'est content de sa fortune, ni mécontent de son esprit. (Mme. Deshoulières) D'ignorance toujours est prête à s'admirer. (Boileau) Il dépend toujours de soi d'agir honorablement. ( Girault- Duvivier) Ici-bas, tout passe, tout casse, tout lasse. translation: No one is pleased with his fortune, nor displeased with his wit. Ignorance is always ready to admire itself. It is always in our power to act honorably. Here below, all passes away, all is fragile, everything wearies. 290 Practical French Course QUARANTE-QUATRIEME LEÇON, LESSON XLIY. I. — How to Form the Compound Tenses of the Verbs of Motion. The following are called verbs of motion : aller, to go ; venir, to come ; sortir, to go out ; partir, to depart ; arriver, to arrive ; retourner, to return ; entrer, to enter ; tomber, to fall. These verbs have their compound tenses formed, not with the auxiliary to lune, as in English, but with the auxiliary to l>c. Thus we say : Je suis allé, J'étais allé, Je serai allé, Je serais allé, Que je sols allé, yue je fusse allé, Etant allé, lamg I wilt be g>"ie, t begone, thai I may />.• that I might be gone t for I have gone or I -went. — I had gone, — / will have gone. I would have gone. that I may have .cone, that I might have gone, having gone. From the above first persons the others can easily be formed. Practical French Course PRACTICE. 291 Où est votre frère ? Il est sorti. Où est-il allé ? Il est allé à Brooklyn. Pourquoi n'êtes-vous pas venu ? Pourquoi n'est-il pas venu ? Pourquoi n'est-elle pas venue ? Pourquoi ne sont-ils pas venus ? Pourquoi ne sont-elles pas venues ? A quelle heure êtes- vous parti ? A quelle heure est-il parti ? A quelle heure est-elle partie ? A quelle heure sont-ils partis ? Votre oncle est-il arrivé ? Votre tante est-elle arrivée ? Quand êtes-vous arrivé ? Quand sont-ils arrivés ? S'il avait fait beau temps je serais sorti. Où seriez-vous allé ? Je serais allé faire une promenade à cheval. Pensez- vous qu'il soit arrivé ? Pensiez- vous qu'il fût arrivé ? Je ne pense pas qu'il soit arrivé. Je ne pensais pas qu'il fût arrivé. Je suis tombé à la renverse. Il est tombé. Votre ami est-il retourné (or de retour) de son voyage ? Il n'est pas encore retourné. Qui est venu ? Personne n'est venu. Where is your brother ? He went out. Where did he go ? He went to Brooklyn. Why did you not come ? Why did he not come ? Why did she not come ? Why did they (m.) not come ? Why did they (/. ) not come ? At what time did you leave ? At what time did he leave ? At what time did she leave ? At what time did they leave ? Has your uncle arrived ? Has your aunt arrived ? When did you arrive? When did they arrive ? If it had been fine weather I would have gone out. Where would you have gone ? I would have gone for a ride on horseback. Do you think he has arrived? Did you think he had arrived ? I do not think he has arrived. I did not think he had arrived. I fell backwards. He fell ; he has fallen. Has your friend returned from his trip ? He has not yet returned. Who has come ? Nobody has come. 292 Practical French Course II. — Impersonal Verbs. The impersonal verbs can only be used in the third per- son singular. Ex. : Il pleut, it rains ; il pleuvait, it was raining, etc. PLEUVOIR, to rain. PLEUVANT, raining. PLU, rained. Il pleut. Il pleuvait. Il plut. Il pleuvra. Il pleuvrait. Qu'il pleuve. Il va pleuvoir. Il a plu. Il avait plu. Il aurait plu. Qu'il ait plu. // u raining {It rains). It was raining. It rained. It will rain. It would ram. That it may rain. It is going to rain. It has rained or been raining. It had rained. It -would ha-.'e rained. That it may have rained. NEIGER, to snow. NEIGEANT, snowing. NEIGE, snowed. Il neige. Il neigeait. Il neigea. Il neigera. Il neigerait. Qu'il neige. Il va neiger. Il a neigé. Il avait neigé. Il aurait neigé. Qu'il ait neigé. // /\ snowing ( // snows). It was snowing. ■ td. It wHl a That it may snow. It is going to snow. It has snowed It had snowed. It would have snowed. That it may have snowed. Practical French Course 293 REMARK. — The verb neiger is often replaced in ordinary- conversation by the expression « -tomber de la neige". Il tombe de la neige. Il tombait de la neige. Il tombera de la neige. Il va tomber de la neige. There is a fall of snow. There was a fall of snow. There will be a fall of snow. There is going to be a fall of snow. The following verbs are conjugated like neiger: Bruiner, To drizzle. Grésiller, To sleet. Geler, To freeze. Tonner, To thunder. Grêler, To hail. Venter, To blow (to be windy). FALLOIR, to be necessary. FALLANT, being necessary. FALLU, been necessary. Il faut. Il fallait. Il fallut. Il faudra. Il faudrait. Qu'il faille. Il a fallu. Il avait fallu. Il aurait fallu. Il va falloir. // is necessary. It was (being) necessary. It was necessary. It will be necessary. It would be necessary. That it may be necessary. It has been necessary. It had been necessary. It would have been necessary. It is going to be necessary. FAIRE CHAUD, to be warm (to make warm) of the weather. Il fait chaud. Il faisait chaud. Il fera chaud. Il ferait chaud. Qu'il fasse chaud. Il a fait chaud. Il avait fait chaud. Il aurait fait chaud. Qu'il ait fait chaud. Il va faire chaud. It is (it makes) warm. It was warm,. It will be warm. It would be warm. That it may be warm. It has been warm. It had been warm. It would have been warm. That it may have been warm. It is going to be warm. 294 Practical French Course The following are conjugated like faire chaud Faire froid. Faire frais. Faire humide. Faire lourd. Faire beau temps. Faire mauvais temps. Faire du vent. Faire du brouillard. Faire de la poussière. Faire mauvais marcher. Faire du soleil. Faire clair de lune. Faire des éclairs. Faire nuit. To be cold (weather). To be cool. To be damp. To be sult)y. To be fine weather, Tb be bad weather. To be windy. To be foggy. Tb be dusty. To be bad zeal king. To be sunny. To be moonlight. To be lightning. To be night. SEnBLER, to seem. Il semble que.... Il semblait Il semblera. Il semblerait. Il a semblé. Il avait semblé. Il aurait or il eût semblé. 77 seems that.... It seemed. It will seem. It would It has s eeme d. It had seemed. It would have seemed. Il Importe que.... Il Importait que.... Il Importerait que.. IMPORTER, to matter. It matters that.... It mattered that.... It would matter that.. ÊTRE TEHPS, to be time. Il est temps. Il était tempi. Il serait tempt. // is time. time. It would be time. Practical French Course Y AVOIR, there to be (there to have\ 295 Il y a. (Idiomatic.') There z's or there are. Il y avait. There was or there were. Il y aura. There will be. Il y aurait. There would be. Qu'il y ait. That there may be. Qu'il y eût. That there might be. Il y a eu. There has or have been. Il y avait eu. There had been. Il y aura eu. There will have been. Il y aurait eu. There would have been. Qu'il y ait eu. That there may have been. Il va y avoir. There is going to be. EXERCISE FOR TRANSLATION. ENGLISH CONSTRUCTION. FRENCH CONSTRUCTION. 1. I went... i. I am gone... 2. He went... 2. He is gone... 3. We went... 3. We are gone... 4. I arrived yesterday. 4. I am arrived yesterday. 5. We arrived last night. 5. We are arrived yesterday eve- ning. 6. When did he leave ? 6. When is he departed ? 7. When did your friend leave ? 7. When your friend is he de- parted ? 8. When did she return ? 8. When is she returned ? 9. Would you have come ? 9. Would you be come ? 10. Why did not your sister come? 10. Why your sister is she not come? 11. Did he not fall ? 11. Is he not fallen? 12. I entered. 12. I am entered. 13. How is the weather ? 13. What weather makes it ? 14. It is fine weather. 14. It makes fine weather. 15. Is it raining ? 15. Is it that it rains ? 16. It is not raining. 16. It rains not. 17. Do you think it will rain ? 17. Think you that it may rain? 18. I do not think it will rain. 18. It don't think that it may rain. 19. Were there many people ? 19. There had it many of people ? 20. It is time for me to leave. 20. It is time that I may depart. 296 Practical French Course QUARANTE-CINQUIEME lEÇON. LESSON XLY. IRREGULAR VERBS. Verbs which are not conjugated in all their tenses and persons after the model verb of the conjugation to which they belong are called Irregular. The irregularity lies chiefly in the three persons singu- lar and the third person plural of the Indicative present. We will, therefore, give that tense in full, but will mention only the first person of the other tenses. From that the others can easily be formed as their terminations are, as a rule, regular. Pupils must not forget th.it, in conversation, the Past Definite is generally replaced by the Past Indefinite. ALLER, to go. ALLANT, going. ALLE, gone. INDICATIY) I Je vais, . I ,i m going. Tu vas, thon . Il va, he goes. Nous allons, Voua allez, □fl sont, OTHBB tknses. | ist person.) J'allais, / WOS going. J'allai, (je suisalU', ) / wmt. J'irai, I shall go. J'irais, Que j'aille, that à Va, Allez, go. Practicai, French Course PRACTICE. 297 Let the pupil answer the following questions Où vas- tu ? Où allez- vous ? Où va-t-il ? Où vont-ils ? Où êtes-vous allé ? Où est-il allé? Où sont-ils allés? Où irez- vous ? Où irons-nous ? Où voulez- vous que j'aille ? Where art thou going ? Where are you going ? Where is he going ? Where are they going ? Where did you go f Where did he go f Where did they go ? Where will you go ? Where will we go ? Where do you wish me to go ? IDIOMATIC EXPRESSIONS. Allez au devant de lui. Allez chercher un médecin. Il va venir. Il y va de la vie. Cela me va. Ce chapeau vous va bien. Aller à reculons. Aller à tâtons. Aller de l'avant. Aller au trot. Allez toujours. Va pour du vin. (pop.) Allez-y! Allons donc ! Go and meet him. Go for a physician. He will come presently. Life is at stake. That suits me. That hat is very becoming to you. To go backwards. To grope along. To go forward. To trot. Go on ; do not stop. All right ; let us have wine. Go there ! Nonsense / VENIR, to come,. VENANT, coming. VENU, come. Je viens, I come, I am coming. Tu viens, thou comes/. Il vient, he comes. Je venais, ' I was coming Je vins, (je suis venu), I came. Je viendrai, I shall corne. Je viendrais, I would corne. 298 Practicai. French Course Nous venons, we come. Vous venez , you come. Ils viennent, they come. Que je vienne, Que je vinsse, Viens, Venez, that I may come, that J might — come. Verbs conjugated like venir. Revenir, To come again. Devenir, To become. Parvenir, To succeed. Survenir, To happen unexpectedly. Tenir, To hold, to keep. Retenir, To retain. Détenir, Jo detain. Appartenir, To belong. PRACTICE. Let the pupil answer the following questions : Venez- vous ? Viendrez-vous? Viendra-t-il? Bet-il venu ? Voulez-vous que je vit-nue ? odra-t-elle ? .venu votre ami ? Qu'est-elle devenue? Tiendrec-voua votre parole? A qui appartient cette maison? A qui appartiennent ces chevaux? E$at-Ce que ceci vous appartient ? .Ire you coming? Will you comet Will he cotnet Did he come? Do you wish me to comef Will she come bach t What has become of your friend t What has become oj Will you keep your word? •>: does this house belong f To whom do these horses belong f Does this belong to you ? IDIOMATIC EXPRESSIONS Cela fait venir l'eau ft '.a bouche. . qui vient. ..îiir le médi Je viens de •'• Il vient , I said. Il dit, ays. J'ai «lit, Je dirai, I have said. I shall say. Nous «lisons, Je dii I would say. .les, you say. (Jlle je «lise, that I may say. Ils «lisent, they say. Dis, Dites, say or tell. PRACTICE. Je ne sais que dire. Je n'ose le dire. Ne le dites à personne. Je ne le dirai à personne; :t to say. I date not say it. 1 \< not tell an 1 will tell no one. Pracïicai, French CouRvSE 307 Que dites- vous ? Qu'est-ce qu'il dit ? Qu'a-t-il dit ? Que vous a-t-elle dit ? Que vous ont-ils dit ? Que lui avez- vous dit ? Que leur avez -vous dit ? Dites-lui de venir. Dites-lui d'entrer. Dites ce que vous voudrez. Qu'on dise ce qu'on voudra. Dites la vérité. Ne dites pas de mensonge. What do you say? What does he say ? What did he say ? What did she tell you ? What did they tell you f What did you tell him ? What did you tell them ? Tell him or her to come. Tell him to come in. Say what you please. Let people say what they please. Te 1 ! the truth. Do not tell lies. IDIOMATIC EXPRESSIONS. Cela ne dit rien. Cela soit dit en passant. Il trouve à redire à tout. Si le cœur vous en dit. Cela va sans dire. C'est tout dire. C'est à dire. Pour ainsi dire. On dirait que... On le dirait. On eût dit que... Au dire de tout le monde. Est-ce à dire que. . . ? Ce n'est pas à dire que... That is nothing to the purpose. But that by the way. He finds fault with everything. If you have a mind for it. That goes without saying. It is saying all. That is to say. So to speak ; as it were. It looks as though... It looks like it. One would have thought that... According to what everybody says. Does it follow that.. . f It does not follow that. .. FAIRE, to do, or make. FAISANT, doing. F, VIT, done, or made. Je fais, / do, I make. Je faisais, I was doing. Tu fais, thou doest. Je fis, I did or made. Il fait, he does. J'ai fait, I have done. Je ferai, I shall do. Nous faisons, we do. Je ferais, I would do. Vous faites, you do. Que je fasse, that I may do. Ils font, they do. Faites, do or make. 3o8 Practical French Course Verbs conjugated like faire. Défaire, to undo. Refaire, to do again. Contrefaire, to counterfeit. Satisfaire, to satisfy. Surfaire, to overcharge. Forfaire, to forfeit. PRACTICE. Que faites-vous ? Que fait-il ? Qu'est-ce qu'elle fait ? Que font-ils? Qu'avez- vous fait ? Que voulez-vous que je fasse ? Que ferez- vous ? Que feriez- vous ? Qu'allez- vous faire ? Qu'avez- vous à faire? What are you doing ? What is he doing ? What is she doing ? What arc they doing ? What have you done? What do you want me to do ? What -will you do f What would you do? U 'hat aie you going to do ? What have you to do? Faire Faire Paire i aire Paire Paire Paire Paire Faire Paire Paire Paire Paire IDIOMS. savoir, to let one know. Paire cuire, to cook {something). voir, to tAt Paire bouillir, to boil. payer, to charge for. Faire r«">tir, to roast. jx.-nst.-r, to remind. Paire la cuisine, to cook. attention, to fay a tient ion Paire griller, to broil. urn.- visite, to fay a visit. Paire «lu feu, to make a fire. desemplettea,/* make pur- Paire «lu bruit, to make a noise. chases. Paire du tapage, to make a noise. plaisir, to give ffeasure. 1 .lire la moue, to foul. des progrès, to improve. Paire present de. to present with.. •emblant, to feign. Paire le malin, to try to be cun- faillite, to fail in business. ning. I'anmftnei to give aims. Paire le malade, to feign to be ill. des grimaces, to make faces. Paire on procès, to sue {legally). relier, to get (a book) bound. Paire vm droit, to study law. la cour, to court ladies. Paire Ixjii accueil , to welcome. des courbettes, to flatter for Paire sa malle, to pack up. gain. Faire de l'escrime ,lo fence. Practical French Course 309 Faire la sourde oreille, to turn a deaf ear. Faire faire un costume, to have a suit made. Faire une bévue, to make a blunder. Faire face (à), to face. Faire la planche, to float {swim). Faire faire, to order {garments). OTHER IDIOMATIC EXPRESSIONS. Faites mes amitiés à... Faites-lui mes amitiés. N'y faites pas attention. Faites-moi ce plaisir. Je vais faire un tour. Cela vous fait honneur. Cela me fait peur. Qu'est-ce que ça fait ? Cela ne fait rien. Faites en sorte qu'il vienne. Faites votre possible. Je ferai tout mon possible. Faites de votre mieux. Je ferai de mon mieux. Qu'y faire ? Que voulez-vous que j'y fasse? J'ai fort à faire. Une bonne à tout faire. Je n'ai que faire de lui. Je n'en ai que faire. Je ne fais qu'éternuer. Je n'en ferai rien. Cela fait très bien. N'en faites pas cas. C'est bien fait pour vous. Vous feriez mieux de... Comment se fait-il que. . . Give my best regards to... Give him my best regards. Do not mind it. Allow me that pleasure. I am going out for a stroll. That is an honor to you. That frightens me. What does it matter f It makes no difference. Try to have him come. Do all you can. I shall do all I can. Do your best. I will do my best. What is to be done ? How can I help it ? I have a great deal to do. A servant of all work. I have no use for him. I have no use for it. I do nothing but sneeze. I will do nothing of the kind. That looks very well. Make light of it. That serves you right. You had better. . . How is it that... 3i° Practicai. French Course Vous-avez beau faire... Je me fais vieux. Il se fait tard. J'y suis fait. "Jamais", fit-elle, en pleurant. Do what you may... I am getting old. It is getting late. I am used to it. "Never", said she, crying. flETTRE, to put, to put on. METTANT, putting. MIS, put. Je mets, / put. Je mettais, / was putting. Tu mets, t/iou puttest. Je mis, I put. Il met, he puts. J'ai mis, I have put. Je mettrai. 1 shall put. Nous mettons, we put . Je mettrais, I would put. Voua mettez, you put. Que je mette, that I may — Ils mettent, tiny put. Que je misse, that I might — Mets, Mettez, put. Verbs conjugated like mettre. Permettre, Promettre, to permit, to promise. Remettre, Soumettre, to deliver. to submit. CONNAITRE, to know \ people . CONNAISSANT, knowing. CONNU, known. J<- connais, Tu connais, Il connait, Nous connaissons, \'us levez-vous? A quelle heure se lève-t-il? A quelle heure a'est-il l< .•h- ' il faut que je me lève -le bonne heure. At what time doyOUget up f .It what time does he get up ? . It what lime did he get up ? Let up ! I must get up early. &*é\ TILLER, SE RÉVEILLER, to awake again. Je m'éveille de bonne heure. Je me bum éveillé tard. je me sui> réveillé deux fois. I awake very early. I awoke late. twice. Practical French Course 319 REMARK. — Used as an active verb, éveiller means to awaken some one ; réveiller means to interrupt some one's sleep. Eveillez-moi à cinq heures. N'oubliez pas de m'éveiller. Vous m'avez réveillé. Wake me up at five o'clock. Do not forget to wake me up. You woke me up. SE RAPPELER, to remember, {governs a direct regimen.) Vous rappelez- vous ? Je me rappelle. Je ne me rappelle pas. Vous rappelez- vous Mr. X ? Je me le rappelle. Vous le rappelerez-vous ? Je me le rappellerai. Rappelez-vous. Do you remember ? I remember. I do not remember. Do you remember Mr. X? I remember him. Will you remember it ? I will remember it. Remember. SE TROMPER, to be mistaken. Je me trompe. Il se trompe. Vous vous trompez. Je me suis trompé. Il s'est trompé. Nous nous sommes trompés. Ne vous êtes-vous pas trompé ? Je ne me suis pas trompé. Ne vous trompez pas. Je ne me tromperai pas. / am mistaken. He is mistaken. You are mistaken. I was mistaken. He was mistaken. We have made a mistake. Have you not made a mistake ? I have not made a mistake. Do not make a mistake. I will not be mistaken. 320 Practical Frknch Course SE FACHER, to get angry. Ne vous fâchez pas. Je me fâcherai. Je me suis fâché. Il se fâchera. Il s'est fâché. Vous avez tort de vous fâcher. Do not get angry. I will get angry. I got angry. He will get angry. He got ang?y. You are wrong to get angry. S'ENRHUMER, to catch cold. Vous allez vous enrhumer. Je me suis enrhumé. V ou are going to catch cold. I have caught cold. SE MOQUER, to make fun of; to laugh at. Vous moquez-vous de moi ? Je ne me moque pas de vous. On s'est moqué de lui. Je m'en moque ! Are you laughing al me t I am not laughing at you. He was laughed at. What do I care for it ! SE PROMENER, to take a walk. Je vais me promener. Nous allons nous promener. 11 est allé se promener. Allez vous promener. / am going to take a walk. Wê arc going to take a -walk. He -went for a -walk. (,'o ami take a walk. SE DÉPÊCHER, SE HATER, to hurry up. iiez-vous, or hAtez-vpus ' lions nous ; hâtons-nous. (ju'il m dépêcha Qu'elle se hâte. /lurry u/> .' Lit us make haste. Lit him hurry up. Let her hurry up. Practical French Course 321 SE SOUVENIR (de), to remember, {governs an indirect regimen.) Je me souviens de lui. Je me souviens de cela. Je m'en souviens. Souvenez-vous de moi. Je me souviendrai de vous. Souvenez-vous-en ! Je m'en souviendrai. I remember him. I remember that. I remember it. Remember me. I will remember you. Remember it / / will remember it. SE REJOUIR (de), to rejoice at. Je me réjouis de votre succès. Réjouissez-vous ! Ré j ouissons-nous. I rejoice at your success. Be joyous ! Let us rejoice. SE SERVIR (de), to use, to help one's self Puis-je m'en servir? Vous pouvez vous en servir. Je ne m'en sers pas. On ne s'en sert plus. Servez-vous. May I use it ? You can use it. J do not use it. It is out of use. Help yourself. S'ENDORMIR, to fall asleep. Je m'endors très vite. Je ne puis m' endormir. Je më suis endormi Il s'est endormi. Ne vous endormez pas. Ifall asleep very quicklv. I camiof go to sleep. I fell asleep. He fell asleep. Do not fall asleep. 322 Practical French Course SE REPENTIR (de), to repent, to be sorty Vous repentez-vous ? Je me repens. Vous en repentez-vous ? Je m'en repens. Vous vous eu repentirez. Il s'en repentira. Je m'en suis repenti. Do you repent f I repent. Are you sorry for it? I am sorry for it. You will repent it. He will repent it. I have repented. S'APERCEVOIR (de), to perceive, to notice. Je m'en suis aperçu. Il s'en est aperçu. Elle ne s'en apercevra pas. I have noticed it. He has noticed it. She will not notice it. SE TENIR DEBOUT, to stand up. Je me tiendrai debout. Je me suis tenu debout. Tenez-vons debout. Je ne puis me tenir debout. / will stand up. I stood up. Stand up. I cannot stand up. SE PLAINDRE, to complain, to grudge. De quoi troua plaignes- voua ? Je ne me plains p.is. je n. li j>.is 1 it u île me plaindre. il ne se plaint rien. ils ne se plaignent rien. Of what do you complain? J am not complaining, /have no cause fût complaining. He gi udges himself nothing. • udge themselves nothing. SE PLAIRE (à), to take pleasure in. Il se plait à taquiner. VOUS plaisez-VOUS à New York. ? Je in \ <>up. Mi femme s'y plait beaucoup. Nous nous y plaignis beanoonp. He likes to tease. I ' i M like to live in New York ? I like living there very much. My wife likes it very much. II e like it vety much. Practical French Course SE FAIRE HAL, to hurt one's self. 323 Vous allez vous faire mal. Vous vous ferez mal. Vous êtes-vous fait mal ? Je me suis fait mal. S'est-il fait mal? Il ne s'est pas fait mal. You are going to hurt yourself You will hurt yourself. Did you hurt yourself ? I hurt myself. Did he hurt himself? He did not hurt himself. SE TAIRE, to keep still or silent. Voulez- vous vous taire ? Taisez-vous. Je ne veux pas me taire. Il se tut. Will you please keep silent. Keep still. I do not want to keep silent. He remained silent. S'ASSEOIR, to sit dow?i. Ne voulez- vous pas vous asseoir ? Veuillez vous asseoir. Je ne veux pas m 'asseoir. Asseyez- vous sur le gazon. Elle s'est assise. Il ne s'est pas assis. Will you not sit down ? Please be seated. I do not want to sit down. Sit down on the grass. She sat down. He did not take a seat. S'EN ALLER, to go away. Il faut que je m'en aille. Je m'en vais. Il s'en va. Il s'en est allé. Je m'en irai. Allez- vous-en. Allons-nous-en. I must go away. I am going away. He is going away. He went away. I will go away. Go away. Let us go away. 324 Practical French Course OTHER REFLEXIVE VERBS. S'habiller. Se déshabiller. Se raser. Se faire raser. S'habituer . S'accoutumer (à). S'adresser à . Se déchausser. Se fier (à). Se défier (de\ Se méfier (de . S'approcher (de). Se mêler de . Se chauffer. S'éloigner. S'amuser. To dress one's self. To undress one's self. To shave one's self. 1o get shaved. To get accustomed to. To get accustomed to. To apply to. To take off one's shoes. To trust. To distrust. 'To mistrust. Togo near. 7b meddle loith. To warm one's self . way. To amuse one's self. REMARKS ON THE PRONOMINAL FORM. I. The article le, la, les, the, is used, in French, in- stead of a possessive adjective before a regimen when the sense already indicates who the possessor is. The verb is then used reflexively. Thus we say : je me ia\ e lea mains, i.-»\ e la figure, Je me suis coupé le doigt, Il s'est cassé la jambe, lia foulé la cheville, i.a\ e/ voua les mains, Chauffe/.- vous les pieda instead of : Je Lue mes mains. — Il lave sa figure. J'ai coupé mou doigt. Il .1 ca iaé* sa jambe. j'ai foulé ma cheville. TOa mains. Chauffei vos pieda Practical French Course 325 2. The reflexive or pronominal form is often used, in French, instead of the passive form so common in English. Thus, we say idiomatically : Cela se voit tous les jours. Cela se comprend, or s'entend. Cela se dit publiquement. Cela ne se dit pas. Cela se peut. Cela ne se peut pas. Cela ne se mange pas. Cet article se vend bien. Cela ne se refuse pas. That is seen every day. That is understood. That is said publicly. That is not said. That may be. That cannot be. That is not to be eaten, or eatable. That article sells well. That is not to be refused. 3. The pronoun soi, one's self, is used in a general sense and has commonly an indefinite pronoun for correlative. Cela va de soi. (idiom) Chacun pour soi. On a souvent besoin d'un plus petit que soi. That is a matter of course. Every one for himself. We have often need of one more humble than ourselves. 4. The idea of a reciprocal or mutual affection which, in English, is expressed by adding the pronouns each other or one another to the verb, is rendered in French, by the reflexive form, that is, by means of two pronouns of the same person placed before the verb. Thus, for instance : Nous nous aimons. Vous vous aimez. Ils s'aiment. We love each other. You love each other. They love each other. 326 Practical French Course OBSERVATION. To avoid ambiguity, — for the above examples might be translated : we love ourselves, you love yourself , they love themselves, — we add the pronouns l'un l'autre, or les uns les autres, when the action is reciprocal, and the pronouns nous=mêmes, vous-même, vous-mêmes, eux-mêmes, elles- mêmes, when the action is reflexive. Examples : Nous nous aimons nous-mêmes. Vous vous aimez vous-même. Ils s'aiment eux-mêmes, m. | Elles s'aiment elles-mêmes, (f.) Nous nous aimons l'un l'autre. Nous dous aimons les uns les autres. Ils s'aiment l'un l'autre. Nous devona nous aimer les uns les autres. U'e love ourselves. You love yourself. They love themselves. They love themselves. We love each other. We love one another. They love each other. H 'e must love one another. QUARANTE-HUITIEME LEÇON LESSON XLVlli. FRENCH PROVERBS. II n'y a i»as de règle MUM < sception. There is no rule without exception. Il n'y .. HUM épine. There is no rose uithout a thorn. Practical French Course 327 3. Il n'y a pas de fumée sans feu. There is no smoke without fire. 4. Charité bien ordonnée commence par soi-même. Charity begins at home. 5. Un tiens vaut mieux que deux tu l'auras. A bird in the hand is worth two in the bush. 6. Quand le chat n'y est pas les souris dansent. When the cat's away, the mice will play. 7. Mieux vaut tard que jamais. Better late than never. 8. L,a nuit porte conseil. Advise with your pillow. 9. Il faut battre le fer quand il est chaud. Make hay while the sun shines. 10. Il faut garder une poire pour la soif. Put by something for a rainy day. 11. Les petits ruisseaux font les grandes rivières. Many a little makes a mickle. 12. Il n'a pas inventé la poudre. He will not set the river afire. 13. Tomber de Charibde en Scylla. Out of the frying pan into the fire. 14. Un malheur ne vient jamais seul. Misfortunes never come singly. 15. A quelque chose malheur est bon. It is an ill wind that blows nobody good. 16. Loin des yeux, loin du cœur. Out of sight, out of mind. 328 Practical French Course 17. C'est une économie de bouts de chandelle* Penny-wise and pound -foolish. 18. Tout nouveau tout beau. A new broom sweeps clean. 19. Tout ce qui brille u'est pas d'or. All that glitters is not gold. 20. L 'habit ne fait pas le moine. // is not the cowl that makes the friar. 21. A bon chat bon rat. Tit for tat. 22. Tin contre lin. Diamond cut diamond. 23- Sonni suit qui mal y pense. Evil to him that evil thinks. 24. Chacun BOD métier. t,< his trade. 25. Il est l'"ii d'avoir deux cor Lea à son arc. It is : trings to one's how, ire d'une pierre deux couds. with one stone : re qui mule n'ain.i-sr pea mousse . I 1 It :>: • >.v.\ . BOSS. .• ne hasarde rien n'a rien. thing venture nothing ■ 29. Toute ni' d l thing. 30. Ce sont deux têtes dans un même bonnet. : 'id and glove together. Practical French Course 329 31. C'est bonnet blanc et blanc bonnet. Six of one, and half a dozen of the other. 32. Plus on est, plus on rit. The more, the merrier. 33. Rira bien qui rira le dernier. He laughs best who laughs last. 34. Tel père, tel fils. Like father \ like son. 35. Qui se ressemble s'assemble. Birds of a feather flock together. 36. A l'impossible nul n'est tenu. There is no doing impossibilities. 37. Aide-toi et le ciel t'aidera. The Lord helps those ivho help themselves. 38. L'appétit vient en mangeant. Eating brings an appetite. 39. Qui dort dîne. Sleeping is as good as eating. 40. Dis moi qui tu hantes, je te dirai qui tu es. A man is known by the company he keeps. 41. Rome n'a pas été bâtie en un jour. Rome was not built in a day. 42. En forgeant on devient forgeron. Practice makes perfect. 330 Practical French Course QUARANTE-NEUVIEME LEÇON, LESSON LXIX. READING AND MEMORY EXERCISES. SHORT ANECDOTES. Dolabella disait à Ciceron: "Savez-vous bien que je n'ai que trente- ans?" "Je dois le savoir, répondit Cicéron, car il y a plus de dix ans que vous nie le dites." II t'n prédicateur avait ennuyé son auditoire en prêchant sur les béatitudes. I'm- dame lui dit malignement, après le sermon, qu'il en avait oublié une. Laquelle? reprit le prédicateur. Celle-ci, ajouta la daine: Bienheureux ceux qui n'étaient pas à votre sermon. III La reine Elisabeth' étant allée voir le chancelier Bacon- dans une maison de campagne qu'il avait fait bâtir avant sa fortune: ' D'où vient, lui dit-elle. <|\ie vous ave/ fait nue si petite maison?" "Ce n'est paa moi, Madame, répondit le chancelier, qui ai fait ma maison trop petite, c'est vous qui m'avez, fait trop grand pour ma maison." IV Jules Oéaar étant tombé de cheval en entrant dans l'Afrique où il était allé jxnir la conquérir: C'est bon signe, dit-il, que l'Afrique soit sous moi; e<- n'est point une chute, c'est une prise de possession. | Kl is.it. t -th. reine d'Angleterre, fille de Henri VIII., née à Greenwich < i I I^ondres en 1 2 Bacon, chancelier d'Angleterre, célèbre philosophe, né à Londres le 22 janvier lôfll, mort le a%-nl 1026. Practical French Course 331 Cornélie, fille du grand Scipion et femme du consul Sempronius, était dans une compagnie de dames romaines qui étalaient leurs pier- reries, leurs bijoux et leurs ajustements. On demanda à Cornélie de montrer aussi les siens. Cette sage romaine fit aussitôt approcher ses enfants qu'elle avait élevés avec soin pour la gloire de la patrie, et dit, en les montrant: "Voici ma parure, voici mes ornements." VI Monsieur le régent/ par ordre duquel Voltaire était à la Bastille lorsqu'on représentait l'CEdipe de ce célèbre auteur, en fut si content, qu'il rendit la liberté au prisonnier. Voltaire alla sur-le-champ re- mercier son Altesse qui lui dit: "Soyez sage, et j'aurai soin de vous." — "Je vous suis infiniment obligé, répondit le poëte, mais je supplie votre Altesse de ne plus se charger de mon logement." VII Un homme qui avait mauvaise réputation avait écrit à la porte de sa maison ces mots: Que rien de mauvais n'entre ici. Un philosophe allemand demanda, en voyant cette inscription: Par où donc entre le maître de la maison ? VIII Un bourgeois de Plaisance, très pauvre, trouvant de nuit des voleurs dans sa maison, leur dit, sans s'émouvoir: Je ne conçois pas ce que vous cherchez dans ma maison pendant la nuit, puisque moi-même je n'y trouve rien dans le jour. IX 1/ empereur Titus^ disait : Si quelqu'un parle mal de moi, il faut bien se garder de le punir: s'il a parlé par légèreté, il faut le mépriser; si c'est par folie, il faut avoir pitié de lui; si c'est une injure, il faut lui pardonner. /La régence de Philippe, duc d'Orléans, commença au leudemain de la mort de Louis XIV. (1715) et prit fin en 1723, à la déclaration de maiorité de Louis XV. 2 Titus, empereur romain, né en 40, mort en 81 de 1ère chrétienne. 332 Practical French Course X Bautru,' étant en Espagne, alla visiter la fameuse bibliothèque de l'Escurial, où il trouva un bibliothécaire fort ignorant. Le roi l'interrogea sur cette bibliothèque. Elle est très belle, lui dit-il, mais Votre Majesté devrait donner à celui qui en a le soin l'administration de ses finances. Et pourquoi? dit le roi. C'est, répondit Bautru, que cet homme ne touche pas au dépôt qui lui est confié. XI Quelqu'un demandait à Caton- pourquoi, ayant si bien mérité de la république, on ne lui avait point élevé de statues: J'aime mieux, répondit-il, qu'on me fasse cette question, que si on me demandait pourquoi l'on m'en a érigé. XII Pierre le Grand, empereur de Russie, voyant en Sorbonne le tom- beaa da cardinal Richelieu, s'écria: grand homme! si tu vivais . je te donnerais la moitié de mon empire pour que tu m'ap- nverner l'autre. XIII Louis XIII.,' auparavant >\uc d'Orléans, étant sollicité de venger les injures qu'on lui avait laites avant qu'il montât sur le trône, répondit que le roi de France ne devait pas venger les injures du duc d'Orléans. XIV mandait ft un boiteux qui allait à l'armée comme f a n ta wdn pourquoi il ne s'était pas mis .1ms la cavalerie. "C'est, répondit-il, que je ne \ mée ixuir fuir." Btro, chancelier de Gaston, duc d'Orlèana, puis Introduce i ■ ■ satirique et vil .jui ton, célèbre CnrtliBRe et ne terminait jamais un ter: "En outre, je pens.- qa'il iaut détruire Carthage. De lend 3 Louis XIII. fils de Henri IV, roi de France de 1010 à 1013, eut pour ministre KichcHcu. Practical French Course 333 XV Un général français, jaloux et flatteur, disait au duc d'Enghien, qui venait de remporter la célèbre bataille de Rocroi en 1643: "Que pourront dire maintenant les envieux de votre gloire?" — "Je n'en sais rien, répondit-il; je pourrais vous le demander." XVI Waller, poëte anglais; fit en très beaux vers latins un excellent panégyrique de Cromwell, tandis qu'il était Protecteur. Charles II. ayant été rétabli en 1660, Waller lui présenta des vers qu'il avait faits à sa louange. Le roi, les ayant lus, lui reprocha qu'il en avait fait de meilleurs pour Olivier. Waller lui répondit: Sire, nous autres poëtes, nous réussissons mieux en fictions qu'en vérités. XVII I/e duc du Maine, 2 encore enfant, faisait beaucoup de bruit. Le grand Condé qui était dans le même appartement, se plaignit de ce bruit: Plût à Dieu, monsieur, lui dit l'enfant, que j'en fisse autant que vous. XVIII Philippe dit à son fils Alexandre, en lui donnant Aristote pour pré- cepteur: "Apprenez, sous un si bon maître, à éviter les fautes dans lesquelles je suis tombé." XIX L,es Français assiégeaient une place: l'officier qui les commandait fit proposer aux grenadiers une somme considérable pour celui qui, le premier, planterait une fascine dans le fossé exposé à tout le feu des ennemis. Aucun des grenadiers ne se présente. L,e général étonné leur en fait des reproches. Nous nous serions tous offerts, lui répondit un de ces braves soldats, si l'on n'avait pas mis cette action à prix d'argent. / Duc du Maine, second enfant de Eouis XIV. et de Mme. de Montespan ; né en 1670, mort en 1736. 334 Practical French Course Un paysan coupait un arbre au bord d'une rivière; par malheur, sa cognée tomba dans l'eau et il ne put la retrouver. Mercure lui apparut: — Est-ce là ta cogfnée, brave homme? en lui en montrant une d'or — Non, cette cognée n'est pas la mienne — C'est peut-être celle-ci? en lui en présentant une autre d'argent — Non, ce n'est point encore celle qui m'appartient — C'est donc celle-ci? en lui en présentant une de fer, qui était réellement celle qu'il avait perdue — Voici vraiment la cognée dont la perte m'afflige — Prends celle-ci, et encore les deux premières que je t'ai montrées ; reçois-les pour prix de ta bonne foi. La probité est la meilleure politique. CINQUANTIEME LEÇON, LESSON L. CLASSICAL DEFINITIONS. ETC. 1. Qu'est-ce que' î.i grammaire? i,;i grammaire est l'art de parler et d'écrire correctement. 2. Qu'est-ce que L'article? [/article est un mot qui se place ordinairement devant les noms communs pour Indiquer qu'ils sont employés dans un Bens dé- terminé. Il \ .i. en français, trois sortes d'articles: l'article défini, l'article Indéfini et l'article partitif. [/article, en français, s'accorde en genre et en nombre avec le nom auquel il se rapporte. iWhat ù '- translated IS Preach by Qa'eat-ce qae >>r yu'eat-ce que rim-, lot iu-t.iiKc, one n <|ue la grammaire? or: Qn'est-ce qae C*e*l qae la grammaire— What is grammar ? Practicai, French Course 335 3. Qu'est-ce que l'adjectif ? I/adjectif est un mot que l'on joint au substantif pour le quali- fier ou le déterminer. Il y a deux sortes d'adjectifs: les adjectifs qualificatifs et les adjectifs déterminatifs. 4. Qu'est-ce que le pronom? Le pronom est un mot qui tient la place du nom. Il y a cinq sortes de pronoms en français: les pronoms personnels, démon- stratifs, possessifs, relatifs et indéfinis. 5. Qu'est-ce que le verbe? Le verbe est un mot qui exprime une action ou un état sous une forme variable, suivant les dispositions du sujet parlant. 6. Qu'est-ce que l'adverbe? L'adverbe est un mot invariable qui sert à modifier un verbe, un adjectif ou un autre adverbe. Ex.: Parlez peu, réfléchissez beaucoup. Dieu est infiniment parfait. Le temps passe très rapidement. 7. Qu'est-ce que la préposition? La préposition est un mot invariable qui sert à unir deux mots en marquant le rapport qu'ils ont entre eux. 8. Qu'est-ce que la conjonction ? La conjonction est un mot invariable qui sert à joindre entre elles les propositions ou les parties essentielles d'une même proposition, et à marquer le rapport qui existe entre elles. 9. Qu'est-ce que l'arithmétique? L'arithmétique est la science des nombres, ou l'art de calculer. 10. Qu'est-ce que l'algèbre? L'algèbre est une science qui a pour but de simplifier et de généraliser les questions relatives au nombre. 336 Practical French Course 11. Qu'est-ce que la trigonométrie? La trigonométrie est le calcul des éléments des triangles définis par des données numériques suffisantes. 12. Qu'est-ce que la géométrie? La géométrie est une science qui a pour objet la mesure de l'étendue et, plus généralement, l'étude de l'espace et de ses propriétés. 13- Qu'est-ce que la physique? La physique est une science qui a pour objet l'étude des pro- priétés l< l i partie des sciences naturelles qui traite des animaux. qui a pour but la connaissance de la lure du globe tern --ne et l'biatoire de la terre. Practical French Course 337 19. Qu'est-ce que la cosmographie? Iva cosmographie est la description du monde physique. 20. Qn 'est-ce que l'astronomie? I/astronomie est une science qui a pour objet de faire connaître les astres, leur constitution, leurs positions relatives et les lois de leurs mouvements. 21. Qu'est-ce que la géographie? Iya géographie est une science qui a pour but la description rai- sonnée de la terre, l'explication des formes du sol et des dif- férents aspects de la vie à la surface du globe. 22. Qu'est-ce que la rhétorique? Iva rhétorique est un art qui donne les règles pour bien dire, pour parler éloquemment; c'est la théorie de l'éloquence. 23. Qu'est-ce que la philosophie? I^a philosophie est la science générale des êtres, des principes et des causes. 24. Qu'est-ce que la politique? I*a politique est l'art de gouverner un Etat. L,a science politique traite de la formation, de l'organisation et des fonctions de l'Etat. 25. Qu'est-ce que la religion ? .L,a religion est le culte qui se rend à la Divinité. 26. Qu'est-ce que la France? L,a France est cette grande et noble nation qui a donné au monde civilisé les immortels principes de liberté, d'égalité et de fra- ternité. 33S Practical Frenxh Course 27. Qu'est-ce que la langue française? La langue française est l'instrument le plus parfait sur lequel on puisse jouer la divine musique de la pensée humaine. (J?. D.) 28. Qu'est-ce que l'homme? Borné dans sa nature, infini dans ses vœux, 1/ homme est un dieu tombé'qui se souvient des cieux. (Lamartine) 29. Qu'est-ce que la vie? La vie est un combat dont la palme est aux cieux. (Corneille') I/i \ ii- est vaine ; l'u peu '!' uni iur, l'n peu de haine, Et puis bonjour ! ] ,a vie est brève ; l'n peu d'espoir, Un peu de lè\ e, l'.t puis bonsoir ! ( Pu Maurier) vgÇpt